FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1068 802.11a/b/g/n/ac WLAN+Bluetooth PCI-E Mini Card

User Guide Product notice Software terms This guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a refund subject to the refund policy of your place of purchase. For any further information or to request a full refund of the computer, please contact your local point of sale (the seller). Copyright 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: June 2013 Document Part Number: 722962-001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Starting right ................................................................................................................................................... 1 Best practices ....................................................................................................................................... 1 Fun things to do .................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources .............................................................................................................................. 2 2 Getting to know your computer ..................................................................................................................... 4 Finding your hardware and software information ................................................................................. 4 Locating hardware ............................................................................................................... 4 Locating software ................................................................................................................. 4 Front ..................................................................................................................................................... 4 Right side ............................................................................................................................................. 5 Left side ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Back ..................................................................................................................................................... 8 Top ....................................................................................................................................................... 8 Bottom .................................................................................................................................................. 9 Labels ................................................................................................................................................... 9 Identifying the labels ............................................................................................................ 9 3 Connecting to a network .............................................................................................................................. 10 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................... 10 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 10 Using an Internet service provider ..................................................................................... 10 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................................ 11 Configuring a wireless router ............................................................................................. 11 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................................... 11 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................................... 12 Connecting to a wired network ........................................................................................................... 13 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) ......................................................................... 13 4 Enjoying entertainment features ................................................................................................................. 14 Volume control ................................................................................................................................... 14 Using the webcam .............................................................................................................................. 14 Using audio ........................................................................................................................................ 14 Adjusting the volume ......................................................................................................... 14 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................... 14 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................... 15 v Using Beats Audio ............................................................................................................. 15 Accessing Beats Audio ..................................................................................... 15 Using video ......................................................................................................................................... 15 Using Intel Wireless Display and Wireless Music (select models only) ............................. 15 Managing your audio and video files .................................................................................................. 15 5 Navigating using the keyboard and pointing devices ............................................................................... 16 Using touch screen gestures .............................................................................................................. 16 One-finger slide ................................................................................................................. 16 Tapping .............................................................................................................................. 17 Scrolling ............................................................................................................................. 17 Pinching/stretching ............................................................................................................ 18 Rotating (select models only) ............................................................................................ 18 Edge swipes ...................................................................................................................... 18 Right-edge swipe .............................................................................................. 19 Left-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 19 Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe .......................................................... 20 Using the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 21 Using the action keys ......................................................................................................... 22 Using Microsoft Windows 8 shortcut keys ......................................................................... 23 Using the integrated numeric keypad ................................................................................ 23 6 Managing power ............................................................................................................................................ 25 Initiating Sleep and Hibernation ......................................................................................................... 25 Intel Rapid Start Technology (select models only) ............................................................ 25 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep .................................................................................. 25 Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation ........................................................................ 26 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 26 HP CoolSense (select models only) ................................................................................................... 26 Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) .......... 27 Shutting down (turning off) the computer ........................................................................................... 27 7 Managing and sharing information ............................................................................................................. 28 Using a USB device ........................................................................................................................... 28 Connecting a USB device .................................................................................................. 29 Removing a USB device .................................................................................................... 29 Inserting and removing a memory card .............................................................................................. 30 8 Maintaining peak performance .................................................................................................................... 31 Performing routine maintenance ........................................................................................................ 31 vi Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 31 Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 31 Updating programs and drivers ......................................................................................... 31 Cleaning your computer ..................................................................................................... 32 Cleaning products ............................................................................................. 32 Cleaning procedures ......................................................................................... 32 Cleaning the display ......................................................................... 32 Cleaning the sides and cover ........................................................... 32 Cleaning the keyboard ...................................................................... 32 Using security measures .................................................................................................................... 33 Setting Windows passwords .............................................................................................. 33 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................. 34 Using Internet security software ........................................................................................ 34 Installing software updates ................................................................................................ 34 Installing Windows updates ............................................................................... 34 Updating software ............................................................................................. 35 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ...................................................... 36 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................... 36 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 36 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 36 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 37 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ...................................................................................... 37 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device ............................... 38 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ..................................................................................................... 39 Creating recovery media and backups ............................................................................................... 39 Creating HP Recovery media ............................................................................................ 40 Restore and recovery ......................................................................................................................... 41 Using Windows Refresh for quick and easy recovery ....................................................... 42 Remove everything and reinstall Windows ........................................................................ 42 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager .......................................................................... 43 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 43 Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) ...................................... 43 Using HP Recovery media to recover ............................................................... 44 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................... 44 Removing the HP Recovery partition ................................................................................. 44 11 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................................... 46 Wireless connection problems ........................................................................................................... 46 vii Cannot connect to a WLAN ............................................................................................... 46 Cannot connect to a preferred network ............................................................................. 46 Current network security codes are unavailable ................................................................ 47 Cannot connect to the wireless router ............................................................................... 47 Network status icon is not displayed .................................................................................. 48 Power problems ................................................................................................................................. 48 Computer will not turn on or start ....................................................................................... 48 Hard drive error .................................................................................................................. 48 Computer is not responding ............................................................................................... 49 Computer shuts down unexpectedly .................................................................................. 49 Display problems ................................................................................................................................ 49 The display is blank ........................................................................................................... 49 Images on the screen are too large or too small, or the images are fuzzy ........................ 49 Keyboard and mouse problems ......................................................................................................... 49 Audio problems .................................................................................................................................. 51 No sound is produced ........................................................................................................ 51 Software problems ............................................................................................................................. 52 12 Specifications .............................................................................................................................................. 53 Input power ......................................................................................................................................... 53 Operating specifications ..................................................................................................................... 53 13 Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................................................................. 54 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 55 viii 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. To get the most out of your computer, read this chapter to learn about best practices after setup, fun things to do with your computer, and where to get more HP resources. Best practices After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps:

If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 10. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For information, go to Getting to know your computer on page 4 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 14. Back up your hard drive by creating a recovery drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 39. Fun things to do You know you can listen to music on the computer. But did you know that you can also stream live radio to the computer and listen to music or talk radio from all over the world? See Using audio on page 14. Experience music the way the artist intended, with deep controlled base and clear, pure sound. See Using Beats Audio on page 15. Use the new Windows 8 touch gestures for smooth control of images and pages of text. See Using touch screen gestures on page 16. Best practices 1 More HP resources You have already used Setup Instructions to turn on the computer and locate this guide. To locate product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Resource Setup Instructions Windows 8 Basics guide Help and Support From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Instructional videos Go tohttp://www.hp.com/supportvideos (English only) Upgrading and Servicing Guide For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/

contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Contents Overview of computer setup and features. Overview of using Windows 8. A broad range of how-to information and troubleshooting tips. How-to videos about using the features of your computer. Instructions for upgrading or replacing components of your computer. Troubleshooting Solutions to the following problems:

See Troubleshooting on page 46 in this guide for more information. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide, select HP Support Assistant on the Start screen, select My computer, and then select User guides, or go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. Worldwide support web page To get support in your language, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Wireless connection problems Power problems Display problems Keyboard and mouse problems Audio problems Software problems Proper workstation setup. Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury. Electrical and mechanical safety information. Access to the following support options:

Online chat with an HP technician. Email support. Support telephone numbers. HP service center locations. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Important regulatory notices. To access this guide, select the HP Support Assistant app on the Start screen, select My computer, and then select User guides. 2 Chapter 1 Starting right Resource Limited Warranty*

Contents Specific warranty information about this computer. To access this guide, select the HP Support Assistant app on the Start screen, select My computer, and then select Warranty and services, or go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments.

*You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD/DVD provided in the box. In some countries/regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For countries/regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

North America: Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd., Boise, ID 83714, USA Europe, Middle East, Africa: Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9, 20063, Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy Asia Pacific: Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/

contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. More HP resources 3 2 Getting to know your computer Finding your hardware and software information Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, and then in the System area, click Device Manager. A list reveals all the devices installed on your computer. Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

1. From the Start screen, right-click using the external wireless mouse. or Swipe down from the top edge of the computer screen. Select the All apps icon. 2. Front Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3) WLAN antennas (2)*

Send and receive wireless signals. Internal microphones (2) Record audio, automatically filtering out the noise around you and cancelling echoes. Webcam light On: The webcam is on. 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component Description

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) HP TrueVision HD Webcam Records video, captures still photographs, and provides access to video conferences and online chat by means of streaming video. To use the webcam, from the Start screen, type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. Ambient light sensor Automatically adjusts the display brightness based on the lighting conditions in your environment. Speakers (2) Produce sound. Windows button Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. NOTE: Pressing the Windows button again will return you to the previous screen.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. Right side Component Description

(1) Volume control button Controls speaker volume. Right side 5 Component Description

(2) USB 3.0 charging (powered) port

(3) Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-

in (microphone) jack Connects an optional USB device. USB charging ports allow you to charge connected USB devices. Standard USB ports will not charge all USB devices or will charge using a low current. Some USB devices require power and require you to use a powered port. NOTE: USB charging ports can also charge select models of cell phones and MP3 players, even when the computer is off. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Left side Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Rotate button USB 3.0 ports (2) Rotates the orientation of the display 90 degrees. Connect optional USB 1.0, USB 2.0, or USB 3.0 devices and provide enhanced USB power performance for USB 3.0 devices. Hard drive light Blinking: The hard drive is being used. Power connector Connects an AC adapter. AC adapter light White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charged. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. Off: The computer is using DC power. Left side 7 Back Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Stand release button Releases the display stand. Description Display stand Vent Allows the display to be positioned at different angles. Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Top Component

(1) Power button 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button down briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will cause unsaved information to be lost. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures aren't working, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, from the Start screen, type p. In the search box, type power, select Settings, and then select Power options. Bottom Component Description

(1) Memory card reader Reads data from and writes data to memory cards such as Secure Digital

(SD). Labels Identifying the labels The labels on the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot problems. The labels are located underneath the display stand and are visible when the display stand is released. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. You will typically be asked for the product number when working with support. Locate this number before you contact support. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label or labels (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Bottom 9 3 Connecting to a network You can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Wireless technology transfers information across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-

enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close together. For more information about wireless technology, see the information and website links provided in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. Using the wireless controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use the Network and Sharing Center:

1. 2. For more information, go to Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and the select Network and Sharing Center. Using an Internet service provider When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. NOTE: Your ISP will give you a user ID and a password to use for Internet access. Record this information and store it in a safe place. 10 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider A wireless router (2) (purchased separately) NOTE: Some modems have a built-in wireless router. Check with your ISP to determine what type of modem you have. A wireless computer (3) The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. Additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to increase the size of your home network. For help in setting up your WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Configuring a wireless router For help configuring a wireless router, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. NOTE:

It is recommended that you initially connect your new wireless computer to the router by using the network cable provided with the router. When the computer successfully connects to the Internet, disconnect the cable, and access the Internet through your wireless network. Protecting your WLAN When you set up a WLAN or connect to an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. Wireless radio signals travel outside the network, so other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals. Take the following precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a firewall. A firewall checks and requests information that is sent to your network. It then discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. Connecting to a wireless network 11 Wireless encryption uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt information that is transmitted over the network. For more information, go to Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:

1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device in your computer is on. From the Start screen, point to the far-right upper or lower corner of the screen to display the charms. Select Settings, and then click the network status icon. Select a WLAN from the list. 3. 4. 5. Click Connect. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, from the Windows desktop, right-

click the network status icon, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center. Click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. After the connection is made, place the pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far the wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. 12 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Connecting to a wired network WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 (network) cable and an RJ-45 (network) USB adapter. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Plug the RJ-45 (network) USB adapter (1) into a USB port on the computer. Plug one end of the RJ-45 (network) cable (2) into the USB adapter. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (3) or router. NOTE:

interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (4), which prevents Connecting to a wired network 13 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the webcam, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like speakers, headphones, or a gaming console. Volume control The integrated volume control button controls speaker volume on the computer. To increase speaker volume, press and hold the + sign. To decrease speaker volume, press and hold the sign. Using the webcam Your computer has an integrated webcam, a powerful social networking tool that allows you to communicate up close with friends and colleagues next door or on the other side of the world. With the webcam, you can stream video with your instant messaging software, capture and share video, and take still photos. To start the webcam, from the Start screen, type c, and then select Camera. For details about using the webcam, go to Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. Using audio On your HP computer, you can play music CDs, download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web (including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external speakers or headphones. Adjusting the volume 1. From the Start screen, point to the far-right upper or lower corner of the screen to display the charms. Select Settings, and then click the speaker icon. Adjust the slider to increase or decrease the volume. 2. 3. NOTE: You can also adjust the volume using the volume keys on the external wireless keyboard or the volume control button. See Using the action keys on page 22 or Volume control on page 14 for more information. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port on your computer. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. 14 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Connecting headphones You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. Using Beats Audio You can experience Beats Audio through the computer's four internal speakers, through external speakers connected to a USB port, or through Beats Audio headphones connected to the headphone jack. Accessing Beats Audio Use Beats Audio Control Panel to view and manually control audio and bass settings. To open Beats Audio Control Panel, from Start screen, type c, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. Using video Your HP computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer without needing to connect to a network. Using Intel Wireless Display and Wireless Music (select models only) Intel Wireless Display and Wireless Music allow you to transmit your computer content wirelessly to your receive/display device, such as HDTV, monitor, projector, game console, Blu-ray player, or DVR, by using an optional wireless adapter (purchased separately). For details about using the wireless adapter, see the manufacturer's instructions. To open Intel Wireless Display, from the Start screen, type w, and then select Intel WiDi. NOTE: Before using the wireless display feature, be sure that your wireless device is turned on. Managing your audio and video files CyberLink MediaSuite helps you manage and edit your photo and video collections. To open CyberLink MediaSuite, from the Start screen, type c, and then select CyberLink MediaSuite. For more information about using CyberLink MediaSuite, see the software Help. Using video 15 5 Navigating using the keyboard and pointing devices Your computer includes an external wireless keyboard and an external wireless mouse for easy navigation. After you remove the battery tabs from the accessories, they will automatically pair with the computer. NOTE: The wireless receiver is preinstalled in the dedicated USB port on the bottom of the computer stand. If you have any problems with the wireless accessories, remove the receiver from the USB port and then reconnect it. For additional information, see Keyboard and mouse problems on page 49. Using touch screen gestures A touch screen computer allows you to control items on the screen directly with your fingers. TIP: On touch screen computers, you can perform the gestures on the screen or using the keyboard and mouse. One-finger slide The one-finger slide is mostly used to pan or scroll through lists and pages, but you can use it for other interactions, too, such as moving an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. NOTE: When many apps are revealed on the Start screen, you can slide your finger to move the screen left or right. To drag, press and hold an object, and then drag the object to move it. 16 Chapter 5 Navigating using the keyboard and pointing devices Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the tap function. Use one finger to tap an object on the screen to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving the pointer up, down, left, or right on a page or image. Place two fingers on the screen and then drag them in an up, down, left, or right motion. Using touch screen gestures 17 Pinching/stretching Pinching and stretching allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the display and then move your fingers apart. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the display and then move your fingers together. Rotating (select models only) Rotating allows you to turn items such as photos. Anchor the forefinger of your left hand on the object you want to rotate. Using your right hand, slide your forefinger around in a sweeping motion from 12 oclock to 3 oclock. To reverse the rotation, move your forefinger from 3 oclock to 12 oclock. NOTE: Rotate is intended for specific apps where you can manipulate an object or image. Rotate may not be functional for all apps. Edge swipes With edge swipes you can perform tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. 18 Chapter 5 Navigating using the keyboard and pointing devices Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe reveals the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Gently swipe your finger inward from the right edge of the display onto the screen to reveal the charms. Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe reveals your open apps so that you can switch to them quickly. Gently swipe your finger inward from the left edge of the display to switch between apps. Without lifting your finger, swipe back toward the left edge to reveal all open apps. Using touch screen gestures 19 Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe The top-edge swipe or bottom-edge swipe allows you to open a list of apps available on your computer. 1. From the Windows Start screen, gently swipe your finger from the top edge or the bottom edge of the display onto the screen. Tap All apps to view available apps. 2. 20 Chapter 5 Navigating using the keyboard and pointing devices Using the keyboard With the keyboard, you can type to select items and perform the same functions as you do by using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys to perform specific functions. TIP: The Windows logo key on the keyboard allows you to quickly return to the computer Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. Pressing the Windows logo key again will return you to the previous screen. NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) fn key Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with an action key. Windows logo key Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. Pressing the key again returns you to the previous screen. Action keys Perform common tasks. Windows application key Displays options for a selected object. Volume keys Integrated numeric keypad Sleep key Mute or restore speaker sound, and decrease or increase speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Set at the factory to function like an external numeric keypad. To alternate between this numeric function and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrows on the keys), press the num lock key. Initiates Sleep, which saves your information in the system. The display and other system components turn off and power is conserved. To exit Sleep, briefly press the power button. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Sleep. WARNING!

Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation and the information stored is saved to the hard drive. If a critical battery level occurs while the computer is in the Using the keyboard 21 Using the action keys An action key performs an assigned function. The icon on each of the f1 through f12 keys, and the volume (5), and Sleep (7) keys illustrates the assigned function for that key. To use an action key function, press and hold the key. Icon Key Description f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 f8 f9 f10 f11 f12 Allows you to view two apps simultaneously. The apps are displayed side by side. Switches between open apps. NOTE: Continue to press this key until the app you want is displayed. Shows the commands available in an app. Shows a list of recently used apps. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD). Begins, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Stops playing an audio CD, DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Opens the Search charm. Allows you to search an open app or another app, your computer, and the Internet. Opens the Share charm. Allows you to share pictures, files, or webpages. Opens the Devices charm. Allows you to set up printers and synchronize data with your phone and stream video to your wireless TV. Opens the Settings charm. Allows you to personalize your computer: Change your account picture, specify the background and color of your Start screen, and more. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Decreases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. 22 Chapter 5 Navigating using the keyboard and pointing devices Icon Key Description Increases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Initiates Sleep, which saves your information in the system. The display and other system components turn off and power is conserved. To exit Sleep, briefly press the power button. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Sleep. WARNING!

If a critical battery level occurs while the computer is in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation and the information stored is saved to the hard drive. Using Microsoft Windows 8 shortcut keys Microsoft Windows 8 provides shortcuts to perform actions quickly. Several shortcuts will help you with Windows 8 functions. Press the Windows logo key action. For additional information on Windows 8 shortcut keys, go to Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. in combination with the key to perform the Shortcut Keys Shortcut key

Key c d tab Description Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. Pressing the key again returns you to the previous screen. Opens the charms. Opens the Windows desktop. Switches between open apps. alt

f4 Closes an active app. NOTE: Continue to press this key combination until the app you want displays. Using the integrated numeric keypad The computer includes an external wireless keyboard that includes a numeric keypad. Using the keyboard 23 Component num lock key Integrated numeric keypad Description Controls the function of the integrated numeric keypad. Press the key to alternate between the standard numeric function found on an external keypad (this function is turned on at the factory) and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrows on the keys). NOTE: The keypad function that is active when the computer is turned off is reinstated when the computer is turned back on. Set at the factory to function like an external numeric keypad. To alternate between this numeric function and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrows on the keys), press the num lock key. 24 Chapter 5 Navigating using the keyboard and pointing devices 6 Managing power Initiating Sleep and Hibernation Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume working very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 25. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period. Hibernation puts your open documents and programs on your hard drive, and then turns off your computer. NOTE: You can manually initiate Hibernation. See Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 25 and Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation on page 26. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot connect to a network or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Intel Rapid Start Technology (select models only) For select models, the Intel Rapid Start Technology (RST) feature is enabled by default. Rapid Start Technology allows your computer to resume quickly from inactivity. Rapid Start Technology manages your power-saving options as follows:

SleepRapid Start Technology allows you to select the Sleep state. To exit from Sleep, press any key, activate the TouchPad, or briefly press the power button. HibernationRapid Start Technology initiates Hibernation after a period of computer inactivity while the computer is in the Sleep or when the battery reaches a critical level. After Hibernation is initiated, press the power button to resume your work. NOTE: Rapid Start Technology can be disabled in Setup Utility (BIOS). If you want to be able to initiate Hibernation yourself, you must enable user-initiated Hibernation using Power Options. See Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation on page 26. Manually initiating and exiting Sleep To initiate Sleep, from the Start screen, point to the far-right upper or lower corner of the screen to display the charms. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then select Sleep. To exit Sleep:

Briefly press the power button. Press a key on the keyboard. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. Initiating Sleep and Hibernation 25 If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows NOTE:

password before your work will return to the screen. Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation From the Start screen, type power, select Settings, and then select Power Options. In the left pane, select Choose what the power button does. Select Change Settings that are currently unavailable. In the When I press the power button area, select Hibernate. You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options in Control Panel. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Save changes. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. When the computer exits Hibernation, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password before your work will return to the screen. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. From the Start screen, type power, select Settings, and then select Power Options. In the left pane, select Require a password on wakeup. Select Change Settings that are currently unavailable. Select Require a password (recommended). NOTE:

password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-

screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account 5. Click Save changes. HP CoolSense (select models only) HP CoolSense automatically detects when the computer is not in a stationary position and adjusts performance and fan settings to keep the surface temperature of your computer at the optimum level of comfort. When HP CoolSense is off, the position of the computer is not detected and the performance and fan options remain at the factory setting. As a result, the surface temperature of the computer may be higher than it would be with HP CoolSense on. To turn CoolSense off or on, follow these steps:

From the Start screen, type cool, select Settings, and then select HP CoolSense. 26 Chapter 6 Managing power Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) When the computer is in the Sleep state, Intel Smart Connect Technology periodically causes the computer to exit Sleep. If a network connection is available, Smart Connect updates open apps such as your email inboxes, social network sites, and news pages and then returns the computer to the Sleep state. Smart Connect also syncs content that you have created offline, such as emails. When the computer exits Sleep, you have immediate access to your updated information. To enable this feature or manually adjust the settings, from the Start screen, type smart, and then select Intel Smart Connect Technology. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device to a port other than a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Although you can Shut down the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the turn off command, as follows:

NOTE:

Hibernation before shutdown is possible. 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. From the Start screen, point to the far-right upper or lower corner of the screen to display charms, and then click Settings. 3. Click the Power icon, and then click Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete. Click the Power icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then click Shut Down. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) 27 7 Managing and sharing information Drives are digital storage devices or solid-state drives that help you store, manage, share, and access information. Your computer has an internal hard drive that stores your personal files and your computer's software and operating system. For added capacity or functionality, connect an external drive (purchased separately), such as an optical drive or hard drive. To quickly transfer information, connect a Universal Serial Bus (USB) flash drive to the USB port on your computer, or insert the memory card from your phone or camera into the memory card reader. NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, see the manufacturer's instructions. Using a USB device Most computers have at least one USB port, because this versatile interface allows you to connect to numerous kinds of external devices to your computer. Your computer may have more than one type of USB port. See Getting to know your computer on page 4 for the types of USB ports on this computer. Be sure to purchase devices that are compatible with your computer. 28 Chapter 7 Managing and sharing information Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect the device. Connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. A sound indicates that the device has been detected. NOTE: The first time you connect a USB device, a message displays on the Windows desktop and an icon in the notification area lets you know that the device is recognized by the computer. Removing a USB device CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of loss of information or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the USB device. 1. 2. Save your information and close all programs associated with the device. From the Windows desktop, click the hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. A message, Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using a USB device 29 Inserting and removing a memory card To insert a memory card:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the memory card connectors, use minimal force to insert a memory card. 1. Hold the card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. 2. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. A sound indicates that the device has been detected. To remove a memory card:

1. 2. Save your information and close all programs associated with the card. From the Windows desktop, click the remove hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Then, follow the on-screen instructions. Press in on the card (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). 3. 30 Chapter 7 Managing and sharing information 8 Maintaining peak performance Keep your computer at peak operating performance using the practices and tools described in this chapter. Start with routine maintenance, keep the equipment clean, and regularly update software. Also pay attention to important security issues, including passwords, virus protection, and anti-theft measures. Finally, find out how to access your system settings when you need to contact support or run diagnostics on your computer system. Performing routine maintenance Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Click Settings, and then select Free up disk space by deleting unnecessary files. 3. From the Start screen, type disk. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using Disk Defragmenter As you use your computer over time, the files on the hard drive become fragmented. Because of this, the hard drive works harder to locate files, and the computer slows down. Disk Defragmenter consolidates and reorganizes the fragmented files on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. Depending on the size of your hard drive and the number of fragmented files, Disk Defragmenter may need more than an hour to complete the task. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. Click Settings, and then select Defragment and optimize your drives. From the Start screen, type disk. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. Go to the HP support website to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/

country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. At this location, you can also register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. Performing routine maintenance 31 Cleaning your computer Cleaning products Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (For example:

Disposable wipes come in a variety of brand names.) Alcohol-free glass cleaning fluid Water with mild soap solution Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid the following cleaning products:

Strong solvents, such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons, which can permanently damage the surface of the computer. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, which can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is turned on:

Turn off the computer. Disconnect external power. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: Do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that the display is dry before closing the display. Cleaning the sides and cover To clean the sides and cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable l disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. 32 Chapter 8 Maintaining peak performance CAUTION: When cleaning the keyboard, do not let liquids drip between the keys. This can permanently damage internal components. To clean and disinfect the keyboard, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Using security measures A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in the HP Setup Utility (BIOS) that is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every three months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Setting Windows passwords Password User password Administrator password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility (BIOS) contents. Using security measures 33 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility

(BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it revealed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. NOTE:

password check, you must enter the administrator password to access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you enter the power-on password at the first Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: A power-on password is not revealed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

1. To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you expose your computer to viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features is preinstalled on your computer. To access Norton Internet Security, from the Start screen, type n, and then select Norton Internet Security. For more information about protecting your computer from Internet threats, go to Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. Installing software updates Installing Windows updates Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the computer left the factory. Microsoft sends out alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. 34 Chapter 8 Maintaining peak performance To be sure that all available updates are installed on the computer, observe these guidelines:

Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your computer. From the Start screen, type u, select Settings, and then select Windows Update. Enable automatic Windows Update thereafter. Updating software HP recommends that you regularly update the software and drivers that were originally installed on your computer. To download the latest versions, go to http://www.hp.com/support. At this location, you can also register to receive automatic update notifications when updates become available. If you have installed software from other companies, regularly update the software to correct security problems and improve the performance of the software. Using security measures 35 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Information about how to navigate in Setup Utility (BIOS) is located at the bottom of the screen. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be revealed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Setup Utility (BIOS). 1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Main. 3. To exit Setup Utility (BIOS) without saving your changes, use the arrow keys to select Exit, select Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 36. 4. Click Yes. 36 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. 2. Click Updates and tune-ups, and then click Check for HP updates now. 3. 4. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. b. NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before From the Start screen, type e, and then select File Explorer. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 37 To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tools in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 38. b. Hard drive c. BIOS 2. Click the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) download instructions are provided in English only. 1. Go to http://www.hp.com. 2. Click Support & Drivers, and then click the Drivers & Software tab. 3. 4. 5. Enter the product name in the text box, and then click Search. Select your computer model, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, click HP UEFI Support Environment. or Click Download, and then select Run. 38 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Your computer includes tools provided by HP and Windows to help you safeguard your information and retrieve it if you ever need to. These tools will help you return your computer to a proper working state or even back to the original factory state, all with simple steps. This chapter provides information about the following processes:

Creating recovery media and backups Restoring and recovering your system NOTE: This chapter describes an overview of backing up, restoring and recovering options. For more details about the tools provided, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. Creating recovery media and backups Recovery after a system failure is only as good as your most recent backup. 1. After you successfully set up the computer, create HP Recovery media. This step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. HP Recovery media you create will provide the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system and the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image RecoveryReinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. 2. 3. See Creating HP Recovery media on page 40. As you add hardware and software programs, create system restore points. A system restore point is a snapshot of certain hard drive contents saved by Windows System Restore at a specific time. A system restore point contains information that Windows uses, such as registry settings. Windows creates a system restore point for you automatically during a Windows update and during other system maintenance (such as a software update, security scanning, or system diagnostics). You can also manually create a system restore point at any time. For more information and steps for creating specific system restore points, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. As you add photos, video, music, and other personal files, create a backup of your personal information. Windows File History can be set to regularly and automatically back up files from libraries, desktop, contacts, and favorites. If files are accidentally deleted from the hard drive and they can no longer be restored from the Recycle Bin, or if files become corrupted, you can restore the files that you backed up using File History. Restoring files is also useful if you ever Creating recovery media and backups 39 choose to reset the computer by reinstalling Windows or choose to recover using HP Recovery Manager. NOTE: File History is not enabled by default, so you must turn it on. For more information and steps for enabling Windows File History, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. Creating HP Recovery media HP Recovery Manager is a software program that offers a way to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the original operating system and the software programs installed at the factory, and then configures the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore the factory image if you replace the hard drive. Only one set of HP Recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the blank USB flash drive or the number of blank DVD discs that will be required. To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE

(rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or instead you can use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, or you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from the HP website. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take up to an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs. HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue, and the remaining discs will be burned. To create HP Recovery media:

1. 2. If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 43. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Recovery Media Creation, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 40 Chapter 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Restore and recovery There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation and level of expertise:

If you need to restore your personal files and data, you can use Windows File History to restore your information from the backups you created. For more information and steps for using File History, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application or driver. From the Start screen, type recovery, select HP Recovery Manager, select Drivers and Applications Reinstall, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you want to restore the system to a previous state without losing any personal information, Windows System Restore is an option. System Restore allows you to restore without the requirements of Windows Refresh or a reinstallation. Windows creates system restore points automatically during a Windows update and other system maintenance events. Even if you did not manually create a restore point, you can choose to restore to an automatically created restore point. For more information and steps for using Windows System Restore, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. If you want a quick and easy way to recover the system without losing your personal information, settings, or apps that came preinstalled on your computer or were purchased from the Windows Store, consider using Windows Refresh. This option does not require backing up data to another drive. See Using Windows Refresh for quick and easy recovery on page 42. If you want to reset your computer to its original state, Windows provides an easy way to remove all personal data, apps, and settings, and reinstall Windows. For more information, see Remove everything and reinstall Windows on page 42. If you want to reset your computer using a minimized image, you can choose the HP Minimized Image Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or HP Recovery media. Minimized Image Recovery installs only drivers and hardware-enabling applications. Other applications included in the image continue to be available for installation through the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option in HP Recovery Manager. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 43. If you want to recover the computer's original factory partitioning and content, you can choose the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or use the HP Recovery media that you have created. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 43. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 40. If you have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media to restore the factory image to the replacement drive. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 43. If you wish to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option. For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition on page 44. Restore and recovery 41 Using Windows Refresh for quick and easy recovery When your computer is not working properly and you need to regain system stability, the Windows Refresh option allows you to start fresh and keep what is important to you. IMPORTANT: Refresh removes any traditional applications that were not originally installed on the system at the factory. Any Windows 8 apps that came preinstalled on your computer and any that were purchased from the Windows Store will be saved. NOTE: During Refresh, a list of removed traditional applications will be saved so that you have a quick way to see what you might need to reinstall. See Help and Support for instructions on reinstalling traditional applications. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. NOTE: You may be prompted for your permission or password when using Refresh. See Help and Support for more information. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. To start Refresh:

1. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click Change PC settings in the bottom-right corner of the screen, and then select General from the PC settings screen. Scroll the right-side choices down to display Refresh your PC without affecting your files. 4. 5. Under Refresh your PC without affecting your files, select Get started, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Remove everything and reinstall Windows Sometimes you want to perform detailed reformatting of your computer, or you want to remove personal information before you give away or recycle your computer. The process described in this section provides a speedy, simple way to return the computer to its original state. This option removes all personal data, apps, and settings from your computer, and reinstalls Windows. IMPORTANT: This option does not provide backups of your information. Before using this option, back up any personal information you wish to retain. You can initiate this option by using the f11 key or from the Start screen. To use the f11 key:

1. Press f11 while the computer boots. or Press and hold f11 as you press the power button. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Reset your PC, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Choose your keyboard layout. 3. 4. To use the Start screen:

1. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. 2. Click Settings. 42 Chapter 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 3. Click Change PC settings in the bottom-right corner of the screen, and then select General from the PC settings screen. 4. Scroll the right-side choices down to display Remove everything and reinstall Windows. 5. Under Remove everything and reinstall Windows, select Get started, and follow the on-

screen instructions. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you created or by using the HP Recovery partition (select models only). If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 40. Using HP Recovery media, you can choose from one of the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image Recovery (select models only)Reinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows System Recovery and Minimized Image Recovery. What you need to know HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 40. To use the Factory Reset option, you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 40. If the HP Recovery media does not work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from the HP website. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data you wish to retain. Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows you to perform a system recovery or minimized image recovery without the need for recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can only be used if the hard drive is still working. Restore and recovery 43 To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

1. Press f11 while the computer boots. or Press and hold f11 as you press the power button. 2. Choose your keyboard layout. 3. 4. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Recovery media to recover You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly. 1. 2. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the first HP Recovery disc you created into the optical drive on your computer or into an optional external optical drive, and then restart the computer. or Insert the HP Recovery USB flash drive you created into a USB port on your computer, and then restart the computer. NOTE:

computer boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 44. Follow the on-screen instructions. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the 3. Changing the computer boot order If computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection for an optical drive or a USB flash drive. To change the boot order:

1. 2. Restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. 3. 4. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive you want to boot from. Follow the on-screen instructions. Insert the HP Recovery media you created. Removing the HP Recovery partition HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you can no longer use the Windows Refresh option, the Windows option to remove everything and reinstall Windows, or the HP Recovery Manager option. So before you remove the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media on page 40. 44 Chapter 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery 45 11 Troubleshooting Wireless connection problems Some possible causes for wireless connection problems include the following:

Wireless device is not turned on. Wireless device is not installed correctly or has been disabled. Wireless device encountered interference from other devices. Wireless device or router hardware has failed. Cannot connect to a WLAN Be sure that the wireless device is turned on. Then try connecting to the WLAN again. If you have a problem connecting to a WLAN, confirm that the integrated WLAN device is turned on and properly installed on your computer. 1. 2. If you are still unable to connect, follow the steps below. From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. 1. 2. Select System and Security, and then in the System area, click Device Manager. 3. Click the arrow next to Network adapters to expand the list and show all adapters. 4. Identify the WLAN device from the Network adapters list. The listing for a WLAN device may include the term wireless, wireless LAN, WLAN, or 802.11. If no WLAN device is listed, either your computer does not have an integrated WLAN device, or the driver for the WLAN device is not properly installed. For more information about troubleshooting WLANs, see the website links provided in Help and Support. Cannot connect to a preferred network You may not be able to connect to a preferred network because it is a security-enabled WLAN. You must have the security code to connect to this type of WLAN. See the next section for additional information. 46 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting If entering a security code is not the problem, you may have a corrupted WLAN connection. Many times, Windows can automatically repair a corrupted WLAN connection. If there is a network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, right-click the icon, and then click Troubleshoot problems. Windows resets your network device and attempts to reconnect to one of the preferred networks. If there is no network status icon in the notification area, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. Select Troubleshoot problems, and then select the network you want to repair. Current network security codes are unavailable If you are prompted for a security code (or network key) or a name (SSID) when connecting to a WLAN, the network is protected by security. The SSID and security code are alphanumeric codes that you enter into your computer to identify your computer to the network. You must have the current codes to connect to a secure network. For a network connected to your personal wireless router, review the router user guide for instructions on setting up the same codes on both the router and the WLAN device. For a private network, such as a network in an office or at a public Internet chat room, contact the network administrator to obtain the codes, and then enter the codes when your are prompted to do so. Some networks change the SSID or network keys used in their routers or access points on a regular basis to improve security. You must change the corresponding code in your computer accordingly. If you are provided with a new wireless network key and SSID for a network, and if you have previously connected to that network, follow the steps below to reconnect to the network:

1. From the Windows desktop, click the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. 2. Right-click the network, and then click Properties. NOTE:

that the router or access point is operating. If the network you want is not listed, check with the network administrator to be sure 3. Click the Security tab and enter the correct wireless encryption data into the Network security key box. 4. Click OK to save these settings. Cannot connect to the wireless router If you are trying to connect to the wireless router and are unsuccessful, reset the wireless router by removing power from the router for 10 to 15 seconds. If the computer still cannot connect to a WLAN, restart the wireless router. For details, see the router manufacturer's instructions. Wireless connection problems 47 Network status icon is not displayed If the network status icon is not displayed in the notification area after you configure the WLAN, the software driver is either missing or corrupted. A Windows Device not Found error message may also be displayed. To resolve this problem, get the latest version of the WLAN device software and drivers for your computer from the HP website at http://www.hp.com. 1. Open your Internet browser. 2. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. 3. Click the option for software and driver downloads, and then type your computer model number in the search box. Press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 4. NOTE:

website for the latest software. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's Power problems Computer will not turn on or start Shut down the computer. Test the AC outlet by connecting a different electrical device to it. 1. 2. 3. Reconnect the computers cables, being sure that the connection from the AC adapter to the 4. computer and the connection from the AC adapter to the AC outlet are secure. Try to turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the connections are secure and the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact support for information about obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Hard drive error 1. Press the ctrl+alt+delete keys simultaneously. 2. Click the Power icon, and then click Restart. Or, press and hold the power button on the computer for 5 or more seconds to turn off the computer, and then press the power button to turn on the computer. If Windows opens, immediately back up all important information to an external hard drive. 3. 4. Whether Windows started or not, contact support. Either the hard drive or the system board may need to be replaced. 48 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Computer is not responding Press the ctrl+alt+delete keys. Use the Windows Task Manager to close any programs that are not responding. 1. 2. Click Task Manager. 3. If closing programs does not work, restart the computer. 1. 2. Click the Power icon, and then click Restart. Or, press and hold the power button on the Select any program that is not responding, and then click End Task. Press the ctrl+alt+delete keys. computer for 5 or more seconds to turn off the computer, and then press the power button to turn on the computer. Computer shuts down unexpectedly The computer might be in an exceedingly hot environment. Turn it off and let it cool down. Be sure that the computer vents are not blocked and that the internal fan is running. See Getting to know your computer on page 4 for the location of the computer vents. Display problems The display is blank Exit Sleep to redisplay the screen image. Press the power button briefly. Press a key on the keyboard. Press the space bar. Press the esc key. Press the power button to turn on the computer. Images on the screen are too large or too small, or the images are fuzzy From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select Appearance and Personalization. Adjust the resolution settings. 1. 2. 3. Under Display, select Adjust Screen Resolution. 4. Adjust resolution as necessary, and then click Apply. Keyboard and mouse problems Be sure that you are using the keyboard or mouse within range of the receiver. Be sure that the mouse is not in Suspend mode, which occurs after 20 minutes of inactivity. Click the left mouse button to reactivate it. Display problems 49 Replace the batteries in the keyboard and mouse. Remove the wireless USB receiver on the bottom of the stand, and then reinsert it. Re-pair the keyboard and mouse to the receiver. NOTE: The illustrations below may look slightly different from your keyboard and mouse. IMPORTANT: During these steps, place the keyboard and mouse on the same level as the receiver. To re-pair the keyboard and mouse:

1. Disconnect the receiver from the USB port on the bottom of the computer stand, and then reconnect it. See Bottom on page 9for the location of the USB port. 2. Be sure that the mouse is on (1), and then press and hold the Connect button (2) for 5 to 10 seconds, until the LED on the receiver lights up or stops flashing. To confirm the connection, move the mouse and check for a response on the screen. 3. After the mouse connection is established, complete the following steps to re-pair the keyboard. 50 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 4. Press and hold the Connect button (3) for 5 to 10 seconds, until the LED on the receiver lights up or stops flashing. Audio problems No sound is produced Be sure that you connected powered speakers and that they are turned on. Adjust the volume, either on the speakers or through the computer operating system. Turn off your computer, and then unplug and reconnect the speakers. Be sure that the speakers are properly connected. Unplug headphones if they are connected to your computer (or speaker system). If the computer is in the Sleep state, exit Sleep by briefly pressing the power button. Check the audio functions. To check the audio functions on your computer, follow these steps:

From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. 1. 2. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. 3. When the Sound window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the Test button. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the recording functions on your computer, follow these steps:

From the Start screen, type s, and then select Sound Recorder. 1. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your Windows desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play back the sound. NOTE: To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, from the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Audio problems 51 Software problems Shut down the computer, and then turn it on again. Update or reinstall the drivers. See Updating programs and drivers on page 31. Refresh or restore your computer. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 39. 52 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Operating specifications NOTE: To see the electrical ratings, refer to your computers ratings label, located on the outside of the computer. Factor Operating temperature Storage temperature Operating humidity Operating altitude Storage altitude Metric 5C to 35C 30C to 65C U.S. 41F to 95F 22F to 149F 15% to 80% @ 26C 15% to 80% @ 78F 0 m to 2000 m 0 m to 4572 m 0 ft to 6561 ft 0 ft to 15,000 ft Input power 53 13 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded, and then remove the cover. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling a component, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface of the component. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. If you need more information about static electricity or assistance with component removal or installation, contact support. 54 Chapter 13 Electrostatic Discharge Index A AC adapter light, identifying 7 action keys identifying 21 next track or section 22 play, pause, resume 22 previous 22 stop 22 using 22 ambient light sensor, identifying 5 audio-out (headphone) jacks 6 B backing up personal files 40 backups 39 Beats Audio 15 Beats Audio Control Panel 15 best practices 1 BIOS determining version 36 downloading an update 37 updating 36 Bluetooth device 10 Bluetooth label 9 boot order changing HP Recovery Manager 44 buttons power 8 rotate 7 stand release 8 volume control 5 Windows 5 C cables, USB 29 caring for your computer 32 cleaning display 32 keyboard 32 procedures 32 products 32 sides and cover 32 cleaning your computer 32 components back 8 bottom 8, 9 front 4 left-side 7 right-side 5 computer reset 42 connecting to a WLAN 12 connector, power 7 corporate WLAN connection 12 D deleted files restoring 41 Disk Cleanup 31 Disk Defragmenter software 31 drivers, updating 31 E edge swipe gestures 18 edgeswipe gestures top-edge swipe 20 electrical ratings 53 electrostatic discharge 54 F fn key, identifying 21 fun things to do 1 H hard drive light, identifying 7 headphones, connecting 15 Hibernation exiting 26 initiating 26 high-definition devices, connecting 15 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

(UEFI) downloading 38 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 44 starting 44 HP Recovery media creating 40 recovery 44 HP Recovery partition recovery 43 removing 44 hubs 28 I input power 53 installing, critical updates 34 integrated numeric keypad, identifying 21, 24 integrated webcam, identifying 5 Intel Wireless Display 15 Intel Wireless Music 15 internal microphones, identifying Internet connection setup 11 Internet security software, using 4 34 ISP 10 J jacks audio-out (headphone) 6 K keys fn 21 Sleep 21 volume 21 Windows application 21 Windows logo 21 L labels Bluetooth 9 regulatory 9 service 9 wireless certification 9 WLAN 9 LAN, connecting 13 left-edge swipe 19 Index 55 lights AC adapter 7 ambient light sensor 5 hard drive 7 M maintenance, Disk Defragmenter 31 memory card reader, identifying 9 memory card, inserting 30 minimized image creating 43 minimized image recovery 43 N num lock key, identifying 24 O operating specifications 53 original system recovery 43 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 34 Windows 33 pinching touch screen gesture 18 ports Intel Wireless Display 15 Intel Wireless Music 15 USB 3.0 7 power button, identifying 8 power connector, identifying 7 product name and number, computer 9 programs, updating 31 public WLAN connection 12 R re-pair, keyboard and mouse 50 recovery discs 40, 44 HP Recovery Manager 43 media 44 options 39 refresh 42 starting 44 supported discs 40 system 43 USB flash drive 44 using HP Recovery media 40 56 Index recovery media creating 40 creating using HP Recovery Manager 40 recovery partition removing 44 recycle refresh computer 41, 42 computer 41 recovery 41 Windows 42 regulatory information regulatory label 9 wireless certification labels 9 remove everything and reinstall Windows 42 reset computer 41, 42 steps 42 restore Windows File History 41 right-edge swipe 19 rotate button, identifying 7 S security, wireless 11 service label, computer 9 setting password protection on wakeup 26 setup of WLAN 11 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 34 Setup Utility (BIOS), using 36 shortcut keys, Windows 8 23 shutdown 27 Sleep exiting 25 initiating 25 Sleep key, identifying 21 software CyberLink MediaSuite 15 Disk Defragmenter 31 software updates, installing 34 software, updating 35 speakers connecting 14 speakers, identifying 5 specifications 53 stand release button, identifying 8 supported discs recovery 40 system recovery 43 system restore point creating 39 restoring 41 T Touch screen gestures 18, 20 edgeswipe gestures 19 one-finger slide 16 pinching 18 rotating 18 scrolling 17 tapping 17 Touch screen, using 16 traveling with the computer 9 troubleshooting 46 audio functions 51 computer is not responding computer shuts down unexpectedly 49 computer will not turn on 48 display is blank 49 hard drive error 48 images on screen problems 49 49 keyboard 49 mouse 49 re-pair the keyboard and mouse 50 software problems 52 wireless connection 46 turning off the computer 27 U unresponsive system 27 USB 3.0 ports identifying 7 USB cable, connecting 29 USB devices connecting 29 description 28 removing 29 USB hubs 28 V video 15 volume control button, identifying 5 volume dial, identifying 14 volume keys, identifying 21 volume, adjusting 14 W webcam identifying 4 using 14 webcam light, identifying 4 Windows backup 40 File History 40, 41 Refresh 41, 42 reinstall 41, 42 remove everything and reinstall option 42 reset 42 restoring files 41 system restore point 39, 41 Windows application key, identifying 21 Windows button, identifying 5 Windows logo key, identifying 21 Windows passwords 33 Windows updates, installing 34 wired network, connecting 13 wireless certification label 9 wireless controls, operating system 10 wireless light 10 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 12 corporate WLAN connection 12 equipment needed 11 functional range 12 public WLAN connection 12 security 11 using 11 wireless router 11 WLAN device 10 WLAN label 9 Z zooming touch screen gesture 18 Index 57

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2012 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Third Edition: September 2012 Second Edition: July 2012 First Edition: March 2012 Document Part Number: 689409-003 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, desktops, thin clients and personal workstations. WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information. NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers ............................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 3 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 3 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 3 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..... 4 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................. 4 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................... 5 Canada notices .................................................................................................................................... 5 European Union regulatory notices ...................................................................................................... 5 Declaration of Conformity .................................................................................................... 5 Products with wireless modules (EMF) ............................................................... 6 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ..................................... 7 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................... 7 Germany (English text) ....................................................................... 7 Germany (Deutscher text) .................................................................. 7 Japan notices ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................... 9 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................. 9 Mexico notice ....................................................................................................................................... 9 Singapore wireless notice .................................................................................................................... 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice ........................................................................................................ 10 Taiwan notices ................................................................................................................................... 10 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices .......................................................................................... 10 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices .......................................................................................... 10 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 11 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 11 ENERGY STAR compliance ............................................................................................................ 11 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 12 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 12 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 12 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 13 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 13 Canada modem statements ............................................................................................... 15 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................. 15 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 15 Voice support .................................................................................................... 16 v Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 16 Japan power cord notice .................................................................................................... 16 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................ 16 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 16 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ............................................. 17 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 17 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 17 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 17 Canadian modem statements ............................................................................................ 18 Japanese modem statements ............................................................................................ 18 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 19 Voice support .................................................................................................... 19 Electromagnetic compatibility notices ................................................................................................ 20 Federal Communications Commission notice ................................................................... 20 Modifications ..................................................................................................... 20 Cables ............................................................................................................... 20 Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ....................................................................................................... 21 Products with wireless LAN devices ................................................................. 21 Australia telecom statement .............................................................................................. 21 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................... 22 Canadian notice ................................................................................................................. 22 European Union regulatory notices ................................................................................... 22 Declaration of Conformity .................................................................................. 22 Products with wireless modules ....................................................... 23 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................... 24 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................ 24 Japan notice ...................................................................................................................... 24 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings .......................................... 24 South Korea notices .......................................................................................................... 25 Mexico notice ..................................................................................................................... 25 Taiwan NCC notice ............................................................................................................ 25 3 Safety notices for notebook computers ..................................................................................................... 26 Heat-related safety warning notice ..................................................................................................... 26 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................... 26 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 26 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 27 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 27 Cleaning the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 27 vi Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 27 China safety notices ........................................................................................................................... 27 China: Altitude notice ......................................................................................................... 27 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................... 28 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................... 28 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ..................................................... 29 Important safety information ............................................................................................................... 29 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................... 29 Battery replacement notice ................................................................................................................. 30 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 30 Laser safety ........................................................................................................................................ 31 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................ 31 Power supply class I grounding requirements ................................................................... 31 Denmark ............................................................................................................ 31 Finland .............................................................................................................. 31 Norway .............................................................................................................. 31 Sweden ............................................................................................................. 31 Power supply requirements ............................................................................................... 31 For use in Norway ............................................................................................. 32 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................. 32 Japan power cord requirements ........................................................................................ 32 Pinch hazard ...................................................................................................................................... 32 China safety notices ........................................................................................................................... 33 China: Altitude notice ......................................................................................................... 33 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................... 33 Germany acoustics notice .................................................................................................................. 34 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers ....................................................................................... 35 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 35 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................... 35 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 35 China environmental notices .............................................................................................................. 36 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................... 36 Japan material content declaration .................................................................................................... 39 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................. 39 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 39 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances ..................................................................................... 39 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................ 39 vii 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ....................................... 40 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 40 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................... 40 ENERGY STAR qualification (select models only) .......................................................................... 40 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 41 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................. 41 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply .............................................................................. 41 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................... 42 The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................... 42 IT ECO declarations ........................................................................................................................... 43 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................... 44 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) ............................................................................................................................................ 44 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 44

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances) ........................................................................................................................................ 44 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 45 viii 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply on-board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, choose the procedure below that corresponds to the operating system running on your computer. For Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. For Windows 7, follow these steps:

Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Device Manager. For Windows 8, follow these steps:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, and then in the System area, select Device Manager. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. For non-Windows operating systems, follow the instructions provided by your operating system to identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device. Regulatory markings for your country or region may be located on the bottom of the product, either under the battery, under a user-removable door (or some other user-accessible location), or on the wireless or modem module. For Windows 7, to view the FCC IDs for any radio modules in your notebook (such as Bluetooth, WLAN, or WWAN), follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the System Configuration menu. 2. 3. For Windows 8, follow these instructions:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. The FCC IDs are displayed at the bottom of the screen. 1 CAUTION: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not have an FCC ID. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Brazil notice 5 CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter (where applicable) and power cord provided by HP are used. See Power cord set requirements on page 32. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards

(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family and available either within the product documentation or at the following Web site:

www.hp.eu/certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) Compliance is indicated by the CE-marking as shown below. Where applicable for telecommunications products a 4-digit notified body number may follow it as a suffix. Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS: HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with wireless modules (EMF) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The wireless module in your notebook computer is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennas are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The non-FCC, international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work with analogue DTMF Networks. This equipment may have internetworking difficulties in PSTN networks that only support Pulse Dialing. Please consult with your network operator for further assistance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. Germany (Deutscher text) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. European Union regulatory notices 7 Japan notices 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notices Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, South Korea notices 9 regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general in household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENERGY STAR compliance As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the EPAs enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-qualified computers:

The ENERGY STAR program for computers was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way that products achieve this goal is by using the Microsoft Windows power management feature to reduce power consumption when the product is not in use. The power management feature allows the computer to initiate a low-power or Sleep mode after a period of user inactivity. When used with an external ENERGY STAR qualified monitor, this feature also supports similar power management features of the monitor. To take advantage of these potential energy savings, the power management feature has been preset to behave in the following ways when the system is operating on AC power:

Turn off the display after 10 minutes Initiate Sleep after 20 minutes The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. Airline travel notice 11 Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Modem notices 13 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. b. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). d. Modem notices 15 Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice DC plug of external HP power supply Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (Ethernet network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. Modem notices 17 The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

18 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. b. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). d. Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Modem notices 19 Electromagnetic compatibility notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. 20 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding the product, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Or, call (281) 514-3333. To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices This product may be equipped with a wireless LAN device. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to cochannel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Australia telecom statement The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ-11 that are shipped with this computer must be installed only in devices displaying the A-tick. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 21 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. CAUTION: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Canadian notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, this device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antenna for this device is not replaceable. Any attempt at user modification may damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU CE Compliance of this product is only valid if the correct CE-marked AC adapter (where applicable) and power cord provided by HP are used. See also Power cord set requirements on page 32. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards

(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family and available either within the product documentation or at the following Web site:

22 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations www.hp.eu/certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) Compliance is indicated by the CE-marking as shown below. Where applicable for telecommunications products a 4-digit notified body number may follow it as a suffix. Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany. Products with wireless modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The wireless module in your computer is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines

(ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennas are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The non-FCC, international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 23 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work with analogue DTMF Networks. This equipment may have internetworking difficulties in PSTN networks that only support Pulse Dialing. Please consult with your network operator for further assistance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable German ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-mouse and monitor. Germany (Deutscher text) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-Maus und Bildschirm. Japan notice B VCCI-B Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. 24 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations South Korea notices Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Taiwan NCC notice Electromagnetic compatibility notices 25 3 Safety notices for notebook computers WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC/EN 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer: crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 26 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook computers Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m Headset and earphone volume level notice 27 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. 28 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook computers 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment:

Do not disable the power cord grounding plug. The grounding plug is an important safety feature. Plug the power cord in a grounded (earthed) outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the thin client by unplugging the power cord from the electrical outlet. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety, the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. CAUTION:

system, the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC/EN 60950). If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. Important safety information 29 WARNING! The equipment must be provided with a proper AC protective earth (PE) ground connection. Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Battery replacement notice WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:

Do not attempt to recharge the battery. Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. For information about removing a battery, refer to your computer documentation. Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. If the computer includes a headset or earphones and bears the "GS" mark, this combination is in compliance with EN 50332-1. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with these products should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. 30 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or a Hewlett-

Packard authorized replacement. Denmark For tilslutning af de vrige ledere, se medflgende installationsvejledning. Finland Norway Sweden Laite on liitettv suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m kun tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag, nr den ansluts till ett ntverk. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. For safety reasons, use only the AC adapter provided with the unit or an authorized replacement adapter from Hewlett-Packard. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-

bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Laser safety 31 For use in Norway This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. Power cord set requirements The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from Hewlett-Packard or an approved HP source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

1. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m (6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. 2. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. 32 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. China safety notices 33 Germany acoustics notice Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779) Product noise emission data can be found in the product related IT ECO Declarations at Internet address: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted 34 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/

recycle. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Electronic hardware and battery recycling 35 China environmental notices http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

( http://www. sepa.gov.cn) China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Media (CD/DVD/floppy) O 36 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Part Name Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its amendments. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) X O O

(Cr(VI)) O

(PBB) (PBDE) O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 37

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB) (PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T11363-2006 X SJ/T11363-2006 X RoHS 2003 1 27 2002/95/EC

38 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Japan material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation In Conformity with the EEE regulation EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. Japan material content declaration 39 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. ENERGY STAR qualification (select models only) NOTE: This section applies only to products bearing the Energy Star logo. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR-qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-

qualified computers. The ENERGY STAR Computers Program was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way products achieve this energy efficiency is by reducing power consumption when not being used through the Microsoft Windows Power Management feature. The Power Management feature enables the computer to enter a low-power (or sleep) mode after a period of inactivity. When used with an external monitor that is ENERGY STAR-qualified, this feature also supports the similar power management features of the external monitor. To take advantage of this energy savings, the Power Management feature has been preset to power down the computer and monitor within the following specified periods of inactivity:

40 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Computer Monitor/Integrated Display Desktops and Workstations Within 30 minutes Thin Clients and Desktops Not applicable Within 15 minutes Within 15 minutes Both the computer and monitor can be woken from sleep mode through user interaction with any of the computer input devices (mouse, keyboard, and so on). When configured with Wake On LAN

(WOL) enabled, the computer can also be woken by a network signal. See the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site for more information about the energy and financial savings potential of the Power Management Feature: http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. See the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site for more information about the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits: http://www.energystar.gov. CAUTION: Using the Energy Save Monitor feature with monitors that are not ENERGY STAR-

qualified can cause video distortion when an Energy Save timeout occurs. NOTE: ENERGY STAR is not supported on Desktop PCs and workstations configured with some versions of Linux or FreeDOS. If it is necessary to restore the operating system, you must also reset the ENERGY STAR settings (if applicable) after the restore. For Windows 7, to verify the factory default power settings for your desktop or workstation, select Start > Control Panel, and then type Power Options in the search window. For Windows 8, to verify the factory default power settings for your desktop or workstation, from the Start screen, type power, select Settings, and then select Power Options from the list of applications. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Mercury statement This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. Chemical substances 41 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS)

I/O PCAs

O: SJ/T11363-2006

X: SJ/T11363-2006

XRoHS 20031272002/95/EC

The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 42 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Table 6-1 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybromi-

nated biphenyls

(PBB) Polybromi-

nated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) Motherboard, processor and heat sink X Memory I/O PCAs Power supply Keyboard Mouse Chassis/Other Fans Internal/External Media Reading Devices External Control Devices Cable Hard Disk Drive Display X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. IT ECO declarations Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html IT ECO declarations 43 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal

(modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). NOTE: Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Turkey EEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances)

, 3 2008 1057. The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. 44 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Index A airline travel notice 11 altitude notice 27, 33 B battery notice 11, 26, 39 battery recycling 35 Brazil notice 5 C cable grounding notice 28 Canada modem statement 15 Canada notices 5 China environmental notices 36 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 36, 42 D Declaration of Conformity notebook computers 4 disposal notices battery 39 battery, user replacement 11 equipment 35 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 35 ENERGY STAR compliance 11 environmental notices 35 equipment disposal notice 35 ergonomics notice 7, 24 European Union notices 5, 22 F Federal Communications Commission desktops, thin clients and workstations notice 20 desktops, thin clients, workstations cables 20 desktops, thin clients, workstations modifications 20 notebook computers cables 3 notebook computers modifications 3 notebook computers notice 3 G GS Notice 7, 24 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 27 J Japan material content declaration 39 Japan modem statement 15 Japan notice 8 Japan power cord notice 16 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 44 K keyboard notice 27 L laser safety notice 12 M Macrovision Corporation notice Mexico Sustainable Energy Use 16 Law 39 Mexico wireless notice 9 modem notices 12 modem statements Canada 15 Japan 15 New Zealand 15 U.S. 13 modifications, desktops, thin clients, workstations Federal Communications Commission 20 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 3 N New Zealand modem statement 15 notices airline travel 11 battery 11, 39 battery, user replacement 26 Brazil 5 Canada 5 China restriction of hazardous substances 36, 42 environmental 35 equipment disposal 35 ergonomics 7, 24 European Union 5, 22 headset and earphone volume level 27 Japan 8 Japan power cord 16 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 44 keyboard 27 laser safety 12 Macrovision Corporation 16 Mexico 9 modem 12 perchlorate material 39 power cords 16, 27 Singapore 9 South Korea 9 Taiwan 10 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 10 travel 27 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 39, 44 notices, desktops, thin clients and workstations Federal Communications Commission 20 Index 45 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 3 P power cord notice 16, 27 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 35 S Singapore wireless notice 9 South Korea notice 9 T Taiwan notice 10 Thailand WWAN wireless notice travel notice 27 tropical warning notice 28, 33 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 10 28 U U.S. modem statement 13 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 39, 44 V voice support 16 volume level notice, headset and earphone 27 W wireless LAN devices 4, 21, 22 46 Index

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2012 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Third Edition: September 2012 Second Edition: July 2012 First Edition: March 2012 Document Part Number: 689409-003 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, desktops, thin clients and personal workstations. WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information. NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers ............................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 3 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 3 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 3 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..... 4 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................. 4 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................... 5 Canada notices .................................................................................................................................... 5 European Union regulatory notices ...................................................................................................... 5 Declaration of Conformity .................................................................................................... 5 Products with wireless modules (EMF) ............................................................... 6 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ..................................... 7 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................... 7 Germany (English text) ....................................................................... 7 Germany (Deutscher text) .................................................................. 7 Japan notices ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................... 9 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................. 9 Mexico notice ....................................................................................................................................... 9 Singapore wireless notice .................................................................................................................... 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice ........................................................................................................ 10 Taiwan notices ................................................................................................................................... 10 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices .......................................................................................... 10 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices .......................................................................................... 10 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 11 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 11 ENERGY STAR compliance ............................................................................................................ 11 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 12 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 12 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 12 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 13 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 13 Canada modem statements ............................................................................................... 15 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................. 15 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 15 Voice support .................................................................................................... 16 v Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 16 Japan power cord notice .................................................................................................... 16 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................ 16 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 16 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ............................................. 17 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 17 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 17 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 17 Canadian modem statements ............................................................................................ 18 Japanese modem statements ............................................................................................ 18 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 19 Voice support .................................................................................................... 19 Electromagnetic compatibility notices ................................................................................................ 20 Federal Communications Commission notice ................................................................... 20 Modifications ..................................................................................................... 20 Cables ............................................................................................................... 20 Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ....................................................................................................... 21 Products with wireless LAN devices ................................................................. 21 Australia telecom statement .............................................................................................. 21 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................... 22 Canadian notice ................................................................................................................. 22 European Union regulatory notices ................................................................................... 22 Declaration of Conformity .................................................................................. 22 Products with wireless modules ....................................................... 23 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................... 24 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................ 24 Japan notice ...................................................................................................................... 24 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings .......................................... 24 South Korea notices .......................................................................................................... 25 Mexico notice ..................................................................................................................... 25 Taiwan NCC notice ............................................................................................................ 25 3 Safety notices for notebook computers ..................................................................................................... 26 Heat-related safety warning notice ..................................................................................................... 26 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................... 26 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 26 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 27 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 27 Cleaning the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 27 vi Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 27 China safety notices ........................................................................................................................... 27 China: Altitude notice ......................................................................................................... 27 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................... 28 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................... 28 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ..................................................... 29 Important safety information ............................................................................................................... 29 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................... 29 Battery replacement notice ................................................................................................................. 30 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 30 Laser safety ........................................................................................................................................ 31 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................ 31 Power supply class I grounding requirements ................................................................... 31 Denmark ............................................................................................................ 31 Finland .............................................................................................................. 31 Norway .............................................................................................................. 31 Sweden ............................................................................................................. 31 Power supply requirements ............................................................................................... 31 For use in Norway ............................................................................................. 32 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................. 32 Japan power cord requirements ........................................................................................ 32 Pinch hazard ...................................................................................................................................... 32 China safety notices ........................................................................................................................... 33 China: Altitude notice ......................................................................................................... 33 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................... 33 Germany acoustics notice .................................................................................................................. 34 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers ....................................................................................... 35 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 35 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................... 35 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 35 China environmental notices .............................................................................................................. 36 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................... 36 Japan material content declaration .................................................................................................... 39 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................. 39 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 39 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances ..................................................................................... 39 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................ 39 vii 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ....................................... 40 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 40 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................... 40 ENERGY STAR qualification (select models only) .......................................................................... 40 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 41 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................. 41 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply .............................................................................. 41 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................... 42 The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................... 42 IT ECO declarations ........................................................................................................................... 43 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................... 44 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) ............................................................................................................................................ 44 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 44

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances) ........................................................................................................................................ 44 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 45 viii 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply on-board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, choose the procedure below that corresponds to the operating system running on your computer. For Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. For Windows 7, follow these steps:

Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Device Manager. For Windows 8, follow these steps:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, and then in the System area, select Device Manager. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. For non-Windows operating systems, follow the instructions provided by your operating system to identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device. Regulatory markings for your country or region may be located on the bottom of the product, either under the battery, under a user-removable door (or some other user-accessible location), or on the wireless or modem module. For Windows 7, to view the FCC IDs for any radio modules in your notebook (such as Bluetooth, WLAN, or WWAN), follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the System Configuration menu. 2. 3. For Windows 8, follow these instructions:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. The FCC IDs are displayed at the bottom of the screen. 1 CAUTION: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not have an FCC ID. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Brazil notice 5 CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter (where applicable) and power cord provided by HP are used. See Power cord set requirements on page 32. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards

(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family and available either within the product documentation or at the following Web site:

www.hp.eu/certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) Compliance is indicated by the CE-marking as shown below. Where applicable for telecommunications products a 4-digit notified body number may follow it as a suffix. Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS: HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with wireless modules (EMF) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The wireless module in your notebook computer is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennas are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The non-FCC, international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work with analogue DTMF Networks. This equipment may have internetworking difficulties in PSTN networks that only support Pulse Dialing. Please consult with your network operator for further assistance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. Germany (Deutscher text) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. European Union regulatory notices 7 Japan notices 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notices Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, South Korea notices 9 regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general in household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENERGY STAR compliance As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the EPAs enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-qualified computers:

The ENERGY STAR program for computers was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way that products achieve this goal is by using the Microsoft Windows power management feature to reduce power consumption when the product is not in use. The power management feature allows the computer to initiate a low-power or Sleep mode after a period of user inactivity. When used with an external ENERGY STAR qualified monitor, this feature also supports similar power management features of the monitor. To take advantage of these potential energy savings, the power management feature has been preset to behave in the following ways when the system is operating on AC power:

Turn off the display after 10 minutes Initiate Sleep after 20 minutes The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. Airline travel notice 11 Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Modem notices 13 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. b. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). d. Modem notices 15 Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice DC plug of external HP power supply Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (Ethernet network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. Modem notices 17 The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

18 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. b. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). d. Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Modem notices 19 Electromagnetic compatibility notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. 20 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding the product, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Or, call (281) 514-3333. To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices This product may be equipped with a wireless LAN device. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to cochannel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Australia telecom statement The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ-11 that are shipped with this computer must be installed only in devices displaying the A-tick. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 21 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. CAUTION: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Canadian notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, this device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antenna for this device is not replaceable. Any attempt at user modification may damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU CE Compliance of this product is only valid if the correct CE-marked AC adapter (where applicable) and power cord provided by HP are used. See also Power cord set requirements on page 32. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards

(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family and available either within the product documentation or at the following Web site:

22 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations www.hp.eu/certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) Compliance is indicated by the CE-marking as shown below. Where applicable for telecommunications products a 4-digit notified body number may follow it as a suffix. Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany. Products with wireless modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The wireless module in your computer is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines

(ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennas are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The non-FCC, international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 23 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work with analogue DTMF Networks. This equipment may have internetworking difficulties in PSTN networks that only support Pulse Dialing. Please consult with your network operator for further assistance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable German ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-mouse and monitor. Germany (Deutscher text) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-Maus und Bildschirm. Japan notice B VCCI-B Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. 24 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations South Korea notices Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Taiwan NCC notice Electromagnetic compatibility notices 25 3 Safety notices for notebook computers WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC/EN 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer: crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 26 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook computers Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m Headset and earphone volume level notice 27 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. 28 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook computers 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment:

Do not disable the power cord grounding plug. The grounding plug is an important safety feature. Plug the power cord in a grounded (earthed) outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the thin client by unplugging the power cord from the electrical outlet. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety, the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. CAUTION:

system, the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC/EN 60950). If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. Important safety information 29 WARNING! The equipment must be provided with a proper AC protective earth (PE) ground connection. Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Battery replacement notice WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:

Do not attempt to recharge the battery. Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. For information about removing a battery, refer to your computer documentation. Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. If the computer includes a headset or earphones and bears the "GS" mark, this combination is in compliance with EN 50332-1. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with these products should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. 30 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or a Hewlett-

Packard authorized replacement. Denmark For tilslutning af de vrige ledere, se medflgende installationsvejledning. Finland Norway Sweden Laite on liitettv suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m kun tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag, nr den ansluts till ett ntverk. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. For safety reasons, use only the AC adapter provided with the unit or an authorized replacement adapter from Hewlett-Packard. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-

bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Laser safety 31 For use in Norway This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. Power cord set requirements The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from Hewlett-Packard or an approved HP source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

1. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m (6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. 2. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. 32 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. China safety notices 33 Germany acoustics notice Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779) Product noise emission data can be found in the product related IT ECO Declarations at Internet address: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted 34 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/

recycle. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Electronic hardware and battery recycling 35 China environmental notices http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

( http://www. sepa.gov.cn) China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Media (CD/DVD/floppy) O 36 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Part Name Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its amendments. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) X O O

(Cr(VI)) O

(PBB) (PBDE) O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 37

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB) (PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T11363-2006 X SJ/T11363-2006 X RoHS 2003 1 27 2002/95/EC

38 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Japan material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation In Conformity with the EEE regulation EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. Japan material content declaration 39 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. ENERGY STAR qualification (select models only) NOTE: This section applies only to products bearing the Energy Star logo. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR-qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-

qualified computers. The ENERGY STAR Computers Program was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way products achieve this energy efficiency is by reducing power consumption when not being used through the Microsoft Windows Power Management feature. The Power Management feature enables the computer to enter a low-power (or sleep) mode after a period of inactivity. When used with an external monitor that is ENERGY STAR-qualified, this feature also supports the similar power management features of the external monitor. To take advantage of this energy savings, the Power Management feature has been preset to power down the computer and monitor within the following specified periods of inactivity:

40 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Computer Monitor/Integrated Display Desktops and Workstations Within 30 minutes Thin Clients and Desktops Not applicable Within 15 minutes Within 15 minutes Both the computer and monitor can be woken from sleep mode through user interaction with any of the computer input devices (mouse, keyboard, and so on). When configured with Wake On LAN

(WOL) enabled, the computer can also be woken by a network signal. See the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site for more information about the energy and financial savings potential of the Power Management Feature: http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. See the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site for more information about the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits: http://www.energystar.gov. CAUTION: Using the Energy Save Monitor feature with monitors that are not ENERGY STAR-

qualified can cause video distortion when an Energy Save timeout occurs. NOTE: ENERGY STAR is not supported on Desktop PCs and workstations configured with some versions of Linux or FreeDOS. If it is necessary to restore the operating system, you must also reset the ENERGY STAR settings (if applicable) after the restore. For Windows 7, to verify the factory default power settings for your desktop or workstation, select Start > Control Panel, and then type Power Options in the search window. For Windows 8, to verify the factory default power settings for your desktop or workstation, from the Start screen, type power, select Settings, and then select Power Options from the list of applications. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Mercury statement This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. Chemical substances 41 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS)

I/O PCAs

O: SJ/T11363-2006

X: SJ/T11363-2006

XRoHS 20031272002/95/EC

The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 42 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Table 6-1 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybromi-

nated biphenyls

(PBB) Polybromi-

nated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) Motherboard, processor and heat sink X Memory I/O PCAs Power supply Keyboard Mouse Chassis/Other Fans Internal/External Media Reading Devices External Control Devices Cable Hard Disk Drive Display X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. IT ECO declarations Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html IT ECO declarations 43 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal

(modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). NOTE: Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Turkey EEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances)

, 3 2008 1057. The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. 44 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Index A airline travel notice 11 altitude notice 27, 33 B battery notice 11, 26, 39 battery recycling 35 Brazil notice 5 C cable grounding notice 28 Canada modem statement 15 Canada notices 5 China environmental notices 36 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 36, 42 D Declaration of Conformity notebook computers 4 disposal notices battery 39 battery, user replacement 11 equipment 35 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 35 ENERGY STAR compliance 11 environmental notices 35 equipment disposal notice 35 ergonomics notice 7, 24 European Union notices 5, 22 F Federal Communications Commission desktops, thin clients and workstations notice 20 desktops, thin clients, workstations cables 20 desktops, thin clients, workstations modifications 20 notebook computers cables 3 notebook computers modifications 3 notebook computers notice 3 G GS Notice 7, 24 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 27 J Japan material content declaration 39 Japan modem statement 15 Japan notice 8 Japan power cord notice 16 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 44 K keyboard notice 27 L laser safety notice 12 M Macrovision Corporation notice Mexico Sustainable Energy Use 16 Law 39 Mexico wireless notice 9 modem notices 12 modem statements Canada 15 Japan 15 New Zealand 15 U.S. 13 modifications, desktops, thin clients, workstations Federal Communications Commission 20 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 3 N New Zealand modem statement 15 notices airline travel 11 battery 11, 39 battery, user replacement 26 Brazil 5 Canada 5 China restriction of hazardous substances 36, 42 environmental 35 equipment disposal 35 ergonomics 7, 24 European Union 5, 22 headset and earphone volume level 27 Japan 8 Japan power cord 16 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 44 keyboard 27 laser safety 12 Macrovision Corporation 16 Mexico 9 modem 12 perchlorate material 39 power cords 16, 27 Singapore 9 South Korea 9 Taiwan 10 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 10 travel 27 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 39, 44 notices, desktops, thin clients and workstations Federal Communications Commission 20 Index 45 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 3 P power cord notice 16, 27 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 35 S Singapore wireless notice 9 South Korea notice 9 T Taiwan notice 10 Thailand WWAN wireless notice travel notice 27 tropical warning notice 28, 33 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 10 28 U U.S. modem statement 13 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 39, 44 V voice support 16 volume level notice, headset and earphone 27 W wireless LAN devices 4, 21, 22 46 Index

VIZIO Quick Start Guide 14 and 15.6 thin + Light touch Keep your new PC up to date! Download the latest updates at VIZIO.com. Table of Contents Package Contents ........................................................................ 1 Getting Started .............................................................................. 2 Getting to Know Your PC Ports ................................................................................... 6 Function Keys .................................................................... 8 Touchpad .......................................................................... 10 Whats New in Windows 8 ............................................................. 14 Gestures in Windows 8 .................................................................. 15 Learning More About Windows 8 ................................................. 18 Connecting a USB Device ............................................................ 20 Pairing a Bluetooth Device .......................................................... 22 Troubleshooting ............................................................................. 26 Limited Warranty ............................................................................ 28 BC PrInteD On bambOO PaPer ReNeWABLe ReCYCLABLe ReSPoNSiBLe Package Contents ViZio Thin + Light Touch AC Adapter Power Cable This Quick Start Guide 1 4 Your PC is ready to use. Save the product packaging. it can be used to ship the PC if servicing is needed. 5 Getting to Know Your PC - Ports Right Side USb 3.0 - Connect USB devices. (Thumb drives, tablets, phones, mp3 players, printers, etc.) HDmI Out - Connect to HDMi TVs or monitors to share video, presentations, or to use dual displays. 6 Left Side USb 3.0 - Connect USB devices. (Thumb drives, tablets, phones, mp3 players, printers, etc.) Power - Connect AC adapter here. Headphone - Connect 3.5mm headphone jack. This port can be used with headsets that have a microphone. USb 3.0 - Connect USB devices. (Thumb drives, tablets, phones, mp3 players, printers, etc.) 7 V Key - Launch ViZio experience page. (internet access required) Display toggle - Cycle between PC screen, mirror mode, and external display. Wireless - Turn the wireless on or off. This key affects both WiFi and Bluetooth. brightness Off - Turn brightness of Display completely off. Press again to return to previous setting. mute - Turn speakers off or on. Volume Down - Decrease loudness of speakers. Volume Up - increase loudness of speakers. Previous - When playing media, go to the last chapter or track. brightness Down -

Decrease the brightness of the Display. Play/Pause - When playing media, stop or resume playback. brightness Up - increase the brightness of the Display. 9 next - When playing media, advance to next chapter or track. Getting to Know Your PC - Touchpad Left Click area right Click area 10 Whats New in Windows 8 Windows has been reimagined to focus on your life. its smooth, intuitive, and gives you instant access to your people, apps, and stuff, so you spend less time searching and more time doing. Youll love browsing through the Windows Store and downloading apps to help you work more efficiently, or installing the latest games so you can compete with friends. No matter what you want to do, you can get it done quickly in Windows 8. 14 Learning More About Windows 8 1 To learn more about Windows 8, go to store.VIZIO.com/windows8 18 2 Additional tutorial videos and articles are available at:

windows.microsoft.com/en-US/windows-8/get-started 19 2 Follow Windows on-screen instructions to begin using your device. 21 Pairing a Bluetooth Device 1 Before pairing your Bluetooth-enabled device, consult its user manual. The methods for pairing Bluetooth devices may vary. 22 2 Set your Bluetooth-enabled device to discoverable mode.

(Consult your devices user manual for details.) 23 2 1 4 Select Devices, then select add a device. Follow the on-screen instructions. 25 There is no sound from my PCs speakers. increase the volume using the function keys (F8 and F9). ensure the volume is not muted. Press F7 to toggle the mute function. increase the volume control in Windows. Confirm that the correct default playback device is selected. if you are using external speakers or headphones, ensure they are securely connected to the PC. if they have a manual volume control, increase the volume using that control. i am having trouble with my PC. How do i perform a system restore?

if youre having problems with your PC, you can try to restore, refresh, or reset it. Restoring your PC is a way to undo recent system changes youve made. Refreshing your PC reinstalls Windows and keeps your personal files, settings, and the apps that came with your PC and apps that you installed from Windows Store. Resetting your PC reinstalls Windows but deletes your files, settings, and apps except for the apps that came with your PC. For detailed instructions on how to restore, refresh, or reset your PC, go to:

http://windows.microsoft.com/en-US/windows-8/restore-refresh-reset-pc 27 Limited Warranty This limited warranty covers ViZio computers purchased as new in the United States, Canada, Mexico, and Puerto Rico. ViZio provides a one-year limited warranty and up to one year of complimentary telephone technical support to the original purchaser of new computers against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year of normal consumer (non-commercial) usage and up to ninety (90) days for commercial use. This limited warranty is non-transferrable. if a computer covered by this limited warranty is determined to be defective within the warranty period, ViZio will, unless otherwise required by applicable law, either repair or exchange the computer at its sole option and discretion. to Obtain Warranty Service (Pre-authorization How required) To obtain warranty service, contact ViZio Technical Support via email: TechSupport@ViZio.com (an email agent will respond to your inquiry within one business day) or via phone at 877.698.4946 from 5:00AM to 7:00PM PST, or visit www.ViZio.com. PRe-AUTHoRiZATioN MUST Be oBTAiNeD BeFoRe SeNDiNG ANY CoMPUTeR To A ViZio SeRViCe CeNTeR. Proof of purchase in the form of a purchase receipt or copy thereof is required to show that the computer is within its warranty period. exchange Should ViZio elect to exchange a computer due to a covered defect during the warranty period, the replacement unit may, at ViZios sole option and discretion, be new or one which has been recertified, reconditioned, refurbished or otherwise remanufactured from new or used parts and is functionally equivalent to the original computer. repair: Parts and Labor There will be no charge for parts or labor to repair a computer for a covered defect during the warranty period. Replacement parts may, at ViZios sole option and discretion, be new, used, reconditioned, refurbished or otherwise remanufactured or recertified as functionally equivalent replacement parts. 28 remaining Warranty Repaired or exchanged units are warranted for the remaining portion of the computers original warranty or for ninety (90) days from warranty service or exchange, whichever is longer. Any upgrade to the original computer will be covered only for the duration of the original warranty period. returning Your Computer for Warranty Service ViZio is not responsible for transportation costs to the service center, but ViZio will cover return shipping to the customer. Computer(s) returned to ViZios service center must include all parts and accessories and must be shipped in a single shipment in either the original carton box and shipping material or in packaging that affords an equal degree of protection. Replacement boxes and shipping material may be available from, or required by, ViZio. ViZio Technical Support will provide instructions for packing and shipping the covered computer to the ViZio service center. Please read the Software, Personal Data, and other User Stored information section below for very important warnings regarding data loss on Computers returned for any type of warranty service (repair or exchange). exclusions ViZios one-year limited warranty only covers defects in materials and workmanship. This limited warranty does not cover, for example: abuse, accident, acts of God, consumable parts such as batteries (unless the batterys fully charged capacity falls below 50% of its rated capacity within the first year from the date of purchase) and protective coatings, cosmetic damage (e.g. scratches, dents, cracks), damage caused by use with non-ViZio products (e.g. accessories, housing, parts or software), damages from shipping, improper installation or operation, improper voltage supply or power surges, lack of reasonable use, misuse, modifications or alterations, normal wear and tear or aging, all software including but not limited to operating system software and any and all applications even if distributed by ViZio, as well as installation and set-

up issues or any tampering or repairs attempted by anyone other than by a ViZio authorized service center. Computers oBLiGATioNS, iNCReASe THe SCoPe, oR oTHeRWiSe MoDiFY iN ANY MANNeR THe TeRMS oF THiS LiMiTeD WARRANTY. To THe eXTeNT PeRMiTTeD BY APPLiCABLe LAW, ViZio DoeS NoT WARRANT THAT THe oPeRATioN oF ANY CoMPUTeRS oR SoFTWARe CoVeReD UNDeR THiS LiMiTeD WARRANTY WiLL MeeT YoUR ReQUiReMeNTS, WoRK iN CoMBiNATioN WiTH ANY HARDWARe oR SoFTWARe APPLiCATioNS oR THiRD PARTY SeRViCeS, Be UNiNTeRRUPTeD, eRRoR-FRee, oR WiTHoUT RiSK To, oR LoSS oF, ANY iNFoRMATioN, DATA, SoFTWARe oR APPLiCATioNS CoNTAiNeD THeReiN, oR THAT DeFeCTS iN THe PRoDUCTS oR SoFTWARe WiLL Be CoRReCTeD. SoMe STATeS Do NoT ALLoW LiMiTATioNS oN HoW LoNG AN iMPLieD WARRANTY LASTS oR THe eXCLUSioN oF iNCiDeNTAL oR CoNSeQUeNTiAL DAMAGeS, So THe ABoVe LiMiTATioNS oR eXCLUSioNS MAY NoT APPLY To YoU. THiS WARRANTY GiVeS YoU SPeCiFiC LeGAL RiGHTS, AND YoU MAY ALSo HAVe oTHeR RiGHTS, WHiCH VARY FRoM STATe To STATe. THiS LiMiTeD WARRANTY iS SUBJeCT To CHANGe WiTHoUT NoTiCe. CHeCK www.ViZio.com FoR THe MoST CURReNT VeRSioN oF THiS WARRANTY. in the event that any term or provision contained in this limited warranty is found to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, then such provision shall be deemed modified to the extent necessary to make such provision enforceable by such court, taking into account the intent of the parties. The invalidity in whole or in part of any portion of this limited warranty shall not impair or affect the validity or enforceability of the remaining provisions of this limited warranty. with unreadable or removed serial numbers or requiring routine maintenance are not covered. This limited warranty does not cover any items that are in one or more of the following categories: software; external devices (except as specifically noted); accessories or parts added to a ViZio system after the system is shipped from ViZio; accessories or parts that are not installed in the ViZio factory. All monitors, keyboards, and mice not shipped as original equipment with your computer are not covered. This one year limited warranty does not cover computers sold AS iS, FACToRY ReCeRTiFieD, or by a non-authorized reseller. Limitations THeRe ARe No eXPReSS WARRANTieS oTHeR THAN THoSe LiSTeD oR DeSCRiBeD ABoVe. ANY iMPLieD WARRANTieS, iNCLUDiNG ANY iMPLieD WARRANTY oF MeRCHANTABiLiTY AND FiTNeSS FoR A PARTiCULAR PURPoSe, SHALL Be LiMiTeD iN DURATioN To THe PeRioD oF TiMe SeT FoRTH ABoVe. ViZioS ToTAL LiABiLiTY FoR ANY AND ALL LoSSeS AND DAMAGeS ReSULTiNG FRoM ANY CAUSe WHATSoeVeR iNCLUDiNG ViZioS NeGLiGeNCe, ALLeGeD DAMAGe, oR DeFeCTiVe GooDS, WHeTHeR SUCH DeFeCTS ARe DiSCoVeRABLe oR LATeNT, SHALL iN No eVeNT eXCeeD THe PURCHASe PRiCe oF THe CoMPUTeR. ViZio SHALL NoT Be ReSPoNSiBLe FoR LoSS oF USe, iNFoRMATioN oR DATA iNCLUDiNG THAT CoNTAiNeD iN oR SToReD oN ANY DeViCe ReTURNeD To ViZio, WoRK SToPPAGe, CoMPUTeR FAiLURe oR MALFUNCTioN, FAiLURe oF oTHeR eQUiPMeNT oR CoMPUTeR PRoGRAMS To WHiCH THe CoMPUTeR iS CoNNeCTeD, CoMMeRCiAL LoSS, LoST ReVeNUe oR LoST PRoFiTS, LoSS oF GooDWiLL, LoSS oF RePUTATioN, LoSS oF, DAMAGe To, oR CoRRUPTioN oF iNFoRMATioN, DATA SoFTWARe oR APPLiCATioNS (iNCLUDiNG ANY CoSTS ASSoCiATeD WiTH ReCoVeRiNG, PRoGRAMMiNG, oR RePRoDUCiNG ANY iNFoRMATioN, DATA SoFTWARe, oR APPLiCATioNS SToReD oN oR USeD WiTH ViZio PRoDUCTS, oR ANY FAiLURe To MAiNTAiN THe CoNFiDeNTiALiTY oF ANY iNFoRMATioN oR DATA SToReD oN THe CoMPUTeRS), oR oTHeR iNCiDeNTAL oR CoNSeQUeNTiAL DAMAGeS. No oRAL oR WRiTTeN RePReSeNTATioNS MADe BY ViZio oR ANY SeLLeR, ReSeLLeR oR DiSTRiBUToR oF THe PRoDUCT, iNCLUDiNG eMPLoYeeS AND AGeNTS THeReoF, SHALL CReATe ANY ADDiTioNAL WARANTY 29 Regulatory information in a residential Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to reasonable protection against harmful provide interference installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult technician for help. FCC Caution:

Any Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be the dealer or an experienced radio/TV 30 of the set by Commission

(RF) energy co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Note: The country code selection is for non-US model only and is not available to all US model. Per FCC regulation, all WiFi product marketed in US must fixed to US operation channels only. Operations in the 5.15-5.25GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only. RF Exposure Information (SAR) This device meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio the Federal frequency Communications U.S. Government. The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.

*Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the poser required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model device is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/fccid after searching on FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1068. operating System Computer Monitor on Battery Windows 8 15 minutes 5 minutes Plugged in Windows 8 30 minutes 10 minutes Both the computer and monitor can be woken from sleep mode through user interaction with any of the computer input devices (mouse, keyboard, and so on). You can help reduce electricity usage by shutting down your computer when it is not in use for longer periods of time, such as at night and on weekends. For more information on the eNeRGY STAR program, visit: www.energystar.gov. Screen Savers and Power Settings Screen savers may prevent your computer from going to sleep and as a result waste power. Screen savers may also reduce the life of your monitor by increasing the number of hours the LCD backlight is on. The power settings of your computer are set to minimize energy use while maintaining optimal performance. Because of this ViZio recommends that you do not disable the power settings. reduced Paper Use For some products, ViZio provides online-only user manuals. This enables us to reduce our carbon footprint and cut down on paper waste. it also allows us to make frequent product updates, and ensures that you always have the most recent product information. Products with an online-

only user manual are packaged with a printed Quick Start Guide to help you get up and running quickly. exposure to radio Frequency Wireless radios and Bluetooth devices emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy like other radio devices. While the level of energy is less than other wireless devices (such as mobile phones), you are advised to use the wireless equipment in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity Computer (internal) HDD Capacity Due to pre-installed software, media content, etc., the HDD capacity on ViZio computers may appear to be smaller than the size stated in the product specifications, documentation or on the packaging. The storage capacity of the HDD is as advertised but the actual formatted capacity may vary. Greener Methods enerGY Star The environmental Protection Agencys (ePA) eNeRGY STAR program is a joint effort between the ePA and manufacturers to promote energy-efficient products. Any ViZio product bearing the eNeRGY STAR emblem on the product or during a start-up screen has been certified to comply with the ePA eNeRGY STAR requirements as shipped by ViZio. The Power Management feature enables the computer to enter a low-power (or sleep) mode after a period of inactivity. To take advantage of this energy savings, the Power Management feature has been preset to power down the computer and monitor after the following specified periods of inactivity:

31 Legal Notices Software, Personal Data, and Other User Stored Information iNFoRMATioN, DATA, SoFTWARe oR oTHeR ALL APPLiCATioNS, iNCLUDiNG BUT NoT LiMiTeD To PeRSoNAL CoNTACTS, ADDReSS BooKS, GAMeS, MUSiC, PiCTUReS, AND ViDeoS MAY Be eRASeD DURiNG THe eXCHANGe oR RePAiR PRoCeSS, AND MAY NoT Be ReTRieVeD, ReCoVeReD, BACKeD UP oR ReiNSTALLeD BY ViZio oR ANY ViZio AUTHoRiZeD SeRViCe CeNTeR. To avoid losing such information, data, software or other applications please create a backup before you return or send your computer for warranty service, and disable any and all security passwords. You will be responsible for reinstalling all such information, data, software, other applications, and passwords. This limited warranty does not cover the following:

uninterrupted or error-free operation of a computer, loss of, or damage to your data by a product or any software programs, whether provided with the computer or installed subsequently. Your computer or replacement computer will be returned to you as your computer was configured when originally purchased, subject to applicable software updates. ViZio may install operating system software updates as part of warranty service that may prevent the computer from reverting to an earlier version of the operating system software. Third party applications installed on the computer may not be compatible or work with the computer as a result of the operating system update. ViZio and ViZio service centers are NoT ReSPoNSiBLe for the loss of, or inability to use, such information, data, software or other applications. Software License All software is provided subject to a software license agreement and you agree that you will be bound by 32 such license agreement in addition to these terms. Title to software remains with the applicable licensors. export regulations Customer acknowledges that the ViZio products, which include technology and software, are subject to customs and export control laws in the United States (US). The products may also be subject to the customs and export control laws and regulations of the country in which the products are manufactured and/or received. Under US law, the products may not be sold, leased or transferred to a restricted user or to restricted countries. Further, the products may not be sold, leased or transferred to or used by a user engaged in activities related to weapons of mass destruction, including but not limited to, activities related to the development, design, manufacture or use of nuclear weapons, materials or facilities, missiles or the support of missile projects, or chemical or biological weapons. VIZIO return Policy - Direct Sales if you purchased your computer from a retail store, then returns or exchanges of your computer are controlled by the return policies of such retail store where you purchased your computer. Please contact the store for more information. if you purchased your computer online or directly from ViZio, you may return your computer to ViZio, within the applicable return policy period. This return policy sets out the terms and procedures for returns for direct purchases of new computers from ViZio. PLeASe Do NoT ReTURN YoUR CoMPUTeR To ViZio WiTHoUT PRioR AUTHoRiZATioN. ViZios return policy allows for computers purchased directly from ViZio to be returned by the original purchaser during the initial 30 day period following the date of purchase. First, you must obtain a ViZio return authorization number for each item and part to be returned as provided below. The refund will be the purchase price actually paid by the purchaser, less shipping and handling and any applicable restocking fee. For partial returns, your credit may be less than the invoice or individual component price based on bundled pricing or any promotional discounts or other reductions. Unless the computer is defective or the return is a direct result of a ViZio error, ViZio may charge up to 10% of the purchase price paid as a restocking fee per each item returned. Shipping and handling for returning the computer to ViZio must be paid for by you and is not refundable. return authorization number must first be The obtained from ViZios Customer Service by emailing CustomerSupport@ViZio.com or by calling (877) 698-

4946, 5:00AM to 7:00PM Pacific Time. Please note that holiday hours may vary. For up to date information, please visit www.ViZio.com. Computers must be returned to the address specified by ViZio Customer Service and must be shipped in the original packaging, with freight prepaid to ViZio, and must be received in new and unused condition, along with all media, cables/ cords or other accessories, documentation and any other items included in the original purchase shipment. The returned computer must be complete and as received, thus you agree not to remove or modify any originally loaded software and/or hardware parts. All return authorization numbers must be included in the packaging. ViZio reserves the right to assess fees for any damaged or missing parts in addition to the 10% restocking fee. Return authorization numbers are valid for only 15 days from issuance. This means that you must ship the computer(s) and/or part(s) to ViZio within 15 days of your receipt of the return authorization number. You are responsible for and must prepay all shipping charges and assume all risk of loss or damage to the computer while in transit to ViZio. if the computer is returned to ViZio: (1) without a ViZio return authorization number; and/or (2) beyond the 15 day period; and/

or (3) without proper packaging, ViZio retains the right to refuse delivery of such return, or may return the computer to you at your expense with no refund issued. Upon receipt of your return, as long as such return complies with this return policy and as authorized by ViZio in its sole discretion, ViZio will issue a credit or a refund of the purchase price paid, less shipping and handling and any applicable restocking fees. For defective products, please see ViZios Limited Warranty. Warning: Before returning a computer to ViZio, please remove all personal, confidential and proprietary information from the computer and remove any removable/ external devices, such as compact discs, memory cards, memory sticks or flash drives. ViZio is not responsible for any personal, confidential or proprietary information left on your computer, loss of or damage to data, or lost or damaged removable devices that are included with your returned computer. Before returning a computer for service, make sure to back up any data on the hard drive(s) and on any other storage device in the computer. Computers returned for service may have the data erased from their hard drives and restored to their original state. ViZio is not responsible for any reinstallation or restoration of software programs not originally installed 33 on the computer when manufactured. Internet Connectivity High speed internet connectively required and sold separately. Network conditions, environmental and other factors may negatively affect connectivity and the resulting video quality, if any. information in this Quick Start Guide is subject to change without notice. To review the most updated version of this Quick Start Guide and the associated User Manual, go to http://www.vizio.com. 2012 ViZio, inc. All Rights Reserved. This Quick Start Guide may not be copied in whole or in part without the written permission of ViZio, inc. The following terms are trademarks in the United States, other countries or both, as used in this Quick Start Guide:

ViZio, the ViZio logo, and the V logo are trademarks of ViZio, inc. intel, Pentium and Celeron are registered trademarks of the intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. HDMi and High Definition Multimedia interface are reg-

istered trademarks of HDMi Licensing LLC. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SiG, inc. SRS Premium Sound HD is a trademark of SRS Labs, inc. Premium Sound HD technologies are incorporated un-

der license from SRS Labs, inc. 34 This product qualifies for eNeRGY STAR in the factory default setting and this is the setting in which power savings will be achieved. Changing the factory default picture settings or enabling other features will increase power consumption that could exceed the limits necessary to qualify for eNeRGY STAR rating. NViDiA, the NViDiA logo, GeForce, and NViDiA nForce are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NViD-

iA Corporation in the United States and other countries. other names of companies, products, and services used in this Quick Start Guide may be trademarks, trade names or service marks of others and ViZio, inc. disclaims any interest in trademarks, trade names or service marks other than its own. Mention of non-ViZio products is for informational purposes only. traveling with Your Computer Please consult and follow air travel restrictions applica-

ble to electronic devices and the use and transporta-

tion of battery packs. in-flight use of computers is at the discretion of the airline. Please check with the airline in advance. For best results, follow these additional traveling and shipping tips:

To prepare the computer for traveling or shipping: (1) Back-up your data, (2) Remove all discs and all exter-

nal media/ digital cards, (3) Shut down and then dis-

connect all external devices, and (3) Shut down the computer. Make and bring a back-up of your data, but keep the back-up separate from the computer. Do even more with Your thin + Light touch!

VIZIO High Speed HDmI Cables - extreme Slim Series allow you to output video at Full HD 1080p for presentations, sharing video, using a secondary monitor, and more. This all-in-one ultra-thin cable delivers HD video + audio from your PC to any HDMi-enabled screen. Available at www.ViZio.com 36 201212A-ST Your product information:

- 1 Users Manual 2 -

2013. All Rights Reserved. Aspire R7 Covers: Aspire R7-572 This revision: September 2013 Sign up for an Acer ID and enable Acer Remote Files Open the Acer Portal from the Start screen to sign up for an Acer ID or sign in if you already have an Acer ID. There are three great reason for you to get an Acer ID:

Remotely access your PC from your other devices with our free Acer Remote Files app Get the latest offers and product information Register your device for warranty service For more information please visit the AcerCloud website:

www.acer.com/acercloud Model number: _________________________________ Serial number: _________________________________ Date of purchase: ______________________________ Place of purchase: ______________________________ TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of contents - 3 6 First things first Your guides ............................................. 6 Basic care and tips for using your computer.................................................. 6 Turning your computer on and off............... 6 Taking care of your computer ..................... 7 Taking care of your AC adapter.................. 7 Cleaning and servicing................................ 8 Your Acer notebook tour 9 Screen view............................................. 9 Keyboard view....................................... 10 Left view ............................................... 11 Information on USB 3.0............................. 12 Right view ............................................. 12 Base view .............................................. 13 Using the keyboard 14 Lock keys and embedded numeric keypad................................................... 14 Hotkeys..................................................... 15 To activate hotkeys, press and hold the

<Fn> key before pressing the other key in the hotkey combination...................... 15 Windows keys........................................ 16 Touchpad 17 Touchpad basics ................................... 17 Touchpad gestures................................ 17 Recovery 19 Creating a recovery backup................... 19 Creating a drivers and applications backup................................................... 21 Recovering your system ........................ 23 Reinstalling drivers and applications......... 23 Returning to an earlier system snapshot .. 25 Returning your system to its factory condition.................................................... 26 Recovering from Windows ........................ 26 Recovering from a recovery backup ......... 29 Connecting to the Internet 33 Connecting with a cable ........................ 33 Built-in network feature ............................. 33 Connecting wirelessly............................ 33 Connecting to a wireless LAN................... 33 Connecting to a 3G network ..................... 34 Using a Bluetooth connection 35 Enabling and disabling Bluetooth .......... 35 Enabling Bluetooth from Windows 8 ......... 35 Adding a Bluetooth device..................... 36 39 Acer Touch Tools Touch tool controls ................................ 39 Pointing ..................................................... 39 Using AccuFinger...................................... 40 RepliView.................................................. 40 41 Acer MemoryBinder Getting started ....................................... 41 Assemble your binder ............................ 42 Exporting your memories....................... 44 Acer Screen Grasp 45 Overview................................................ 45 Adjusting the Settings ............................... 46 The editing tool ......................................... 46 48 Acer Scrapboard BIOS utility 50 Boot sequence....................................... 50 Setting passwords ................................. 50 Securing your computer 51 Using a computer security lock.............. 51 Using passwords ................................... 51 Entering passwords .................................. 52 Power management 53 Saving power ......................................... 53 Battery pack 55 Battery characteristics ........................... 55 Charging the battery ................................. 55 Optimizing battery life ............................... 56 Checking the battery level......................... 57 Battery-low warning .................................. 57 Traveling with your computer 58 Disconnecting from the desktop ............ 58 Moving around....................................... 58 Preparing the computer ............................ 58 What to bring to meetings......................... 59 Taking the computer home .................... 59 Preparing the computer ............................ 59 What to take with you................................ 60 Special considerations.............................. 60 Setting up a home office ........................... 60 Traveling with the computer................... 60 Preparing the computer ............................ 61 What to take with you................................ 61 Special considerations.............................. 61 Traveling internationally with the computer 61 Preparing the computer ............................ 61 What to bring with you .............................. 62 Special considerations.............................. 62 4 - Table of contents 64 Acer Converter Port Memory card reader 65 Connectivity options .............................. 65 Video and audio connectors 67 68 HDMI 69 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Frequently asked questions 71 Requesting service................................ 73 Tips and hints for using Windows 8....... 75 How do I get to Start? ............................... 75 What are "Charms?" ................................. 75 75 Can I boot directly to the desktop? ........... 76 How do I jump between apps?.................. 76 How do I turn off my computer?................ 76 How do I unlock my computer?................. 76 How do I personalize my computer?......... 77 Frequently asked questions Where are my apps?................................. 79 What is a Microsoft ID (account)?............. 80 How do I add a favorite to Internet Explorer?................................................... 81 How do I check for Windows updates?..... 81 Where can I get more information?........... 81 Troubleshooting..................................... 82 Troubleshooting tips.................................. 82 Error messages......................................... 82 Frequently asked questions 82 Internet and online security 84 First steps on the net ............................. 84 Protecting your computer.......................... 84 Choose an Internet Service Provider........ 84 Network connections................................. 86 Surf the Net!.............................................. 88 Security..................................................... 88 95 Playing Blu-Ray or DVD movies

- 5 Getting started... In this section you will find:

Useful information on caring for your computer and your health Where to find the power button, ports and connectors Tips and tricks for using the touchpad and keyboard How to create recovery backups Guidelines for connecting to a network and using Bluetooth Information on using Acers bundled software 6 - First things first FIRST THINGS FIRST We would like to thank you for making this Acer notebook your choice for meeting your mobile computing needs. Your guides To help you use your Acer notebook, we have designed a set of guides:

First off, the Setup Guide helps you get started with setting up your computer. The Quick Guide introduces you to the basic features and functions of your new computer. For more on how your computer can help you to be more productive, please refer to the Users Manual. This guide contains detailed information on such subjects as system utilities, data recovery, expansion options and troubleshooting. In addition it contains general regulations and safety notices for your notebook. It is available from the desktop; double-click the Help icon and click Users Manual in the menu that opens. Basic care and tips for using your computer Turning your computer on and off To turn the power off, do any of the following:

Use the Windows shutdown command: Press the Windows key +

<C>, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down. If you need to power down the computer for a short while, but dont want to completely shut it down, you can put it into Hibernate by pressing the power button. First things first - 7 You can also put the computer in sleep mode by pressing the sleep hotkey <Fn> + <F4>. Note If you cannot power off the computer normally, press and hold the power button for more than four seconds to shut down the computer. If you turn off the computer and want to turn it on again, wait at least two seconds before powering up. Taking care of your computer Your computer will serve you well if you take care of it. Do not expose the computer to direct sunlight. Do not place it near sources of heat, such as a radiator. Do not expose the computer to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 50 C (122 F). Do not subject the computer to magnetic fields. Do not expose the computer to rain or moisture. Do not spill water or any liquid on the computer. Do not subject the computer to heavy shock or vibration. Do not expose the computer to dust or dirt. Never place objects on top of the computer. Do not slam the computer display when you close it. Never place the computer on uneven surfaces. Taking care of your AC adapter Here are some ways to take care of your AC adapter:

Do not connect the adapter to any other device. Do not step on the power cord or place heavy objects on top of it. Carefully route the power cord and any cables away from foot traffic. When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord itself but pull on the plug. The total ampere ratings of the equipment plugged in should not exceed the ampere rating of the cord if you are using an extension 8 - First things first cord. Also, the total current rating of all equipment plugged into a single wall outlet should not exceed the fuse rating. Cleaning and servicing When cleaning the computer, follow these steps:

1.Turn off the computer. 2.Disconnect the AC adapter. 3.Use a soft, moist cloth. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. If either of the following occurs:

The computer has been dropped or the body has been damaged;

The computer does not operate normally Please refer to "Frequently asked questions" on page 82. YOUR ACER NOTEBOOK TOUR Your Acer notebook tour - 9 After setting up your computer as illustrated in the Setup Guide, let us show you around your new Acer computer. Screen view 1 2 3

1 2 3 4 Icon Item Webcam Touchscreen Windows key Microphones 5 4 Description Web camera for video communication. A light next to the webcam indicates that the webcam is active. Displays computer output, supports multi-touch input. Tap to return to the Start screen, or to the last open app. Internal stereo microphones for sound recording. 10 - Your Acer notebook tour

5 Icon Item Power indicator Battery indicator Description Indicates the computers power status. Indicates battery status. Charging: The light is amber when the battery is charging. Fully charged: The light is blue. Keyboard view 1 2

1 Icon Item Touchpad Description Touch-sensitive pointing device. The touchpad and selection buttons form a single surface. Press down firmly on the touchpad surface to perform a left click. Press down firmly on the lower right corner to perform a right click.

2 Icon Item Keyboard Left view Your Acer notebook tour - 11 Description For entering data into your computer. See "Using the keyboard" on page 14. Do not use a keyboard protector or similar cover as the keyboard includes ventilation intakes for cooling. 1 2 3 4 5

Icon Item Description Connects to the Acer Converter cable, allowing for easy connection to a LAN, an external display or an additional USB device. There are different cables available. Please check with your retailer to see which are compatible with your computer. Supports high-definition digital video connections. Connect to USB devices. Acer Converter Port HDMI port USB port with power-off charging USB port Headset/speaker jack Speaker Connects to audio devices (e.g., speakers, headphones) or a headset with microphone. Delivers stereo audio output. 1 2 3 4 5 12 - Your Acer notebook tour Information on USB 3.0 USB 3.0 compatible ports are blue. Compatible with USB 3.0 and earlier devices. For optimal performance, use USB 3.0-certified devices. Defined by the USB 3.0 specification (SuperSpeed USB). Right view 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

# Icon 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SD card reader Item Speaker Description Delivers stereo audio output. Accepts one Secure Digital card (SD or SDHC). Push to remove/install the card. Only one card can operate at any given time. USB port Connects to USB devices. Volume control key Adjusts the system volume. Power button Turns the computer on and off. DC-in jack Kensington lock slot Connects to an AC adapter. Connects to a Kensington-

compatible computer security lock. Wrap the computer security lock cable around an immovable object such as a table or handle of a locked drawer. Insert the lock into the notch and turn the key to secure the lock. Keyless models are also available. Base view 1 Your Acer notebook tour - 13 3 2

# Icon 1 2 3 Item Ventilation and cooling fan Speakers Battery reset pinhole Description Allows the computer to stay cool. Do not cover or obstruct the openings. Deliver stereo audio output. Insert a paperclip into the hole and press for four seconds to reset the computer (simulates removing and reinstalling the battery). 14 - Using the keyboard USING THE KEYBOARD The keyboard has full-sized keys and an embedded numeric keypad, separate cursor, lock, Windows, function and special keys. Lock keys and embedded numeric keypad The keyboard has three lock keys which you can toggle on and off. Lock key Caps Lock Description When Caps Lock is on, all alphabetic characters typed are in uppercase. When Num Lock is on, the embedded keypad is in numeric mode. The keys function as a calculator

(complete with the arithmetic operators +, -, *, and /). Use this mode when you need to do a lot of numeric data entry. A better solution would be to connect an external keypad. When Scroll Lock is on, the screen moves one line up or down when you press the up or down arrow keys respectively. Scroll Lock does not work with some applications. Num Lock

<Fn> + <F11>

Scroll Lock

<Fn> + <F12>

The embedded numeric keypad functions like a desktop numeric keypad. It is indicated by small characters located on the upper right corner of the keycaps. To simplify the keyboard legend, cursor-control key symbols are not printed on the keys. Desired access Number keys on embedded keypad Cursor-control keys on embedded keypad Main keyboard keys Num Lock on Type numbers in a normal manner. Hold <Shift> while using cursor-control keys. Hold <Fn> while typing letters on embedded keypad. Hold <Fn> while using cursor-control keys. Type the letters in a normal manner. Num Lock off Using the keyboard - 15 Hotkeys The computer employs hotkeys or key combinations to access most of the computer's controls like screen brightness and volume output. To activate hotkeys, press and hold the <Fn> key before pressing the other key in the hotkey combination. Hotkey Icon Function

<Fn> + <F3>

Airplane mode

<Fn> + <F4>

Sleep

<Fn> + <F5>

Display toggle

<Fn> + <F6>

Display off Description Turns on / off the computer's network devices.

(Network devices vary by configuration.) Puts the computer in Sleep mode. Switches display output between the display screen, external monitor (if connected) and both. Turns the display screen backlight off to save power. Press any key to return. Turns the built-in touchpad on and off.

<Fn> + <F7>

<Fn> + <F8>

<Fn> + <F9>

<Fn> + <F10>

<Fn> + <F11>

<Fn> + < >

<Fn> + < >

Keyboard backlight Touchpad toggle Speaker toggle Turns the speakers on and off. Turns the keyboard backlight on and off. Also adjusts the backlight brightness. Turns the keyboard on and off. Turns the embedded numeric keypad on or off. Increases the screen brightness. Decreases the screen brightness. Brightness up Brightness down Keyboard toggle NumLk 16 - Using the keyboard Hotkey

<Fn> + < >

<Fn> + < >

<Fn> +

<Home>

<Fn> +

<Pg Up>

<Fn> +

<Pg Dn>

<Fn> +

<End>

Icon Function Description Increases the sound volume. Volume up Volume down Decreases the sound volume. Play/Pause Stop Previous Next Play or pause a selected media file. Stop playing the selected media file. Return to the previous media file. Jump to the next media file. Windows keys The keyboard has two keys that perform Windows-specific functions. Key Description Pressed alone it returns to the Start screen or to return to the last open app. It can also be used with other keys for special functions, please check Windows Help. This key has the same effect as clicking the right mouse button; it opens the application's context menu. Windows key Application key TOUCHPAD Touchpad - 17 Touchpad basics The touchpad controls the arrow (or 'cursor') on the screen. As you slide your finger across the touchpad, the cursor will follow this movement. Note The touchpad is sensitive to finger movement; the lighter the touch, the better the response. Please keep the touchpad and your fingers dry and clean. The cursor is controlled by some basic gestures:

Single-finger slide: Slide a finger across the touchpad to move the cursor. Single-finger press or tap: Press the touchpad down, or lightly tap the touchpad with your finger, to perform a 'click', which will select or start an item. Quickly repeat the tap to perform a double tap or 'double click'. Single-finger press in the bottom-right corner: Press the bottom right corner of the touchpad to perform a 'right click'. In the Start screen, the app commands, in most apps this will open a context menu related to the selected item. this will toggle Drag: Press and hold the bottom left corner of the touchpad, or tap twice anywhere on the touchtap, then slide a second finger across the touchpad to select all items in an area. Touchpad gestures Windows 8 and many applications support touchpad gestures that use one or more fingers. Note Support for touchpad gestures depends on the active application. 18 - Touchpad This allows you to control applications with a few simple gestures, such as:

Swipe in from edge: Access Windows tools by swiping into the center of the touchpad from the right, top or left. Swipe in from right edge: Toggle the charms. Swipe in from top edge: Toggle the app commands. Swipe in from left edge: Switch to the previous app. Two-finger slide: Swiftly scroll through web pages, documents and playlists by placing two fingers on the touchpad and moving both in any direction. Two-finger pinch: Zoom in and out of photos, maps and documents with a simple finger-and-thumb gesture. RECOVERY Recovery - 19 If you are having trouble with your computer, and the frequently asked questions (see Frequently asked questions on page 71) do not help, you can 'recover' your computer - i.e. return it to an earlier state. This section describes the recovery tools available on your computer. Acer provides Acer Recovery Management, which allows you to create a recovery backup, a drivers and applications backup, and to start recovery options, either using Windows tools, or the recovery backup. Note Acer Recovery Management is only available with a pre-installed Windows operating system. Important We recommend that you create a Recovery Backup and Drivers and Applications Backup and as soon as possible. In certain situations a full recovery will require a USB recovery backup. Creating a recovery backup To reinstall from a USB storage drive, you must first create a recovery backup. The recovery backup includes the entire original contents of your computers hard drive, including Windows and all factory-loaded software and drivers. Using this backup will restore your computer to the same state as when you purchased it, while giving you an option to retain all settings and personal data. Note Since the recovery backup requires at least 16 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 32 GB or larger. 20 - Recovery 1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. 2.Click Create Factory Default Backup. The Recovery Drive window opens. Make sure Copy contents from the recovery partition to the recovery drive is selected. This provides the most complete and safest recovery backup. 3.Plug in the USB drive then click Next. Since the recovery backup requires at least 16 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 32 GB or larger. Recovery - 21 4.You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 5.Follow the process until it completes. 6.After creating the recovery backup, you can choose to delete the recovery this information, you can only use the USB recovery backup to restore your computer, if you lose or erase the USB drive, you cannot restore your computer. information on your computer. If you delete 7.Unplug the USB drive and label it clearly. Important Write a unique, descriptive label on the backup, such as 'Windows Recovery Backup'. Make sure you keep the backup in a safe place that you will remember. Creating a drivers and applications backup To create a Drivers and Applications Backup, that contains the factory-loaded software and drivers needed by your computer, you 22 - Recovery may use either a USB storage drive or, if your computer features a DVD recorder, one or more blank recordable DVDs. 1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. 2.Click Create Drivers and Applications Backup. Plug in the USB drive or insert a blank DVD into the optical drive, then click Next. If you are using a USB drive, make sure your USB drive has enough capacity before continuing. If using DVDs, it will also show the number of blank, recordable discs you will need to complete the recovery discs. Make sure that you have the required number of identical, blank discs. 3.Click Start to copy files.You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 4.Follow the process until it completes:

If you are using optical discs, the drive ejects each disc as it completes burning it. Remove the disc from the drive and mark it Recovery - 23 with a permanent marker. If multiple discs are required, insert a new disc when prompted, then click OK. Continue until the process is complete. If you are using a USB drive, unplug the drive and label it clearly. Important: Write a unique, descriptive label on each backup, such as

'Drivers and Applications Backup'. Make sure you keep the backup in a safe place that you will remember. Recovering your system To recover your system:

1.Perform minor fixes. If only one or two items of software or hardware have stopped working correctly, the problem may be solved by reinstalling the software or the device drivers. To reinstall software and drivers that were pre-installed at the factory, see Reinstalling drivers and applications on page 23. For instructions on reinstalling software and drivers that were not pre-installed, see that products documentation or support Web site. 2.Revert to a previous system condition. If reinstalling software or drivers does not help, then the problem may be solved by returning your system to a previous state when everything was working correctly. For instructions, see Returning to an earlier system snapshot on page 25. 3.Reset your operating system. If nothing else has solved the problem and you want to reset your system, but keep your user information, see Returning your system to its factory condition on page 26. 4.Reset your system to its factory condition. If nothing else has solved the problem and you want to reset your system to factory condition, see Returning your system to its factory condition on page 26. Reinstalling drivers and applications As a troubleshooting step, you may need to reinstall the applications and device drivers that came pre-installed on your computer from the 24 - Recovery factory. You can reinstall using either your hard drive or the backup you have created. Other applications - If you need to reinstall software that did not come pre-installed on your computer, you need to follow that softwares installation instructions. New device drivers - If you need to reinstall device drivers that did not come pre-installed on your computer, follow the instructions provided with the device. If you are reinstalling using Windows and the recovery information stored on your computer:

1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. 2.Click Reinstall Drivers or Applications. 3.You should see the Contents section of the Acer Resource Center. Images for reference only. Recovery - 25 4.Click the install icon for the item you want to install, then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation. Repeat this step for each item you want to reinstall. If you are reinstalling from a Drivers and Applications Backup on a DVD or USB drive:

1.Insert the Drivers and Applications Backup into the disc drive or connect it to a free USB port. If you inserted a DVD wait for Acer Resource Center to start. If Acer Resource Center does not start automatically, press the Windows key + <E>, then double-click on the optical drive icon. If you are using a USB drive, press the Windows key + <E>, then double-click on the drive that contains the backup. Double-click on ResourceCenter. 2.You should see the Contents section of the Acer Resource Center. Images for reference only. 3.Click the install icon for the item you want to install, then follow the onscreen prompts to complete the installation. Repeat this step for each item you want to reinstall. Returning to an earlier system snapshot Microsoft System Restore periodically takes a 'snapshot' of your system settings and saves them as restore points. In most cases of hard-to-resolve software problems, you can return to one of these restore points to get your system running again. 26 - Recovery Windows automatically creates an additional restore point each day, and also each time you install software or device drivers. Note For more information about using Microsoft System Restore, from Start, type Help and then click Help and Support in the list of apps. Type Windows system restore in the Search Help box, then press Enter. Returning to a restore point 1.From Start, type Control Panel and then click Control Panel in the list of apps. 2.Click System and Security > Action Center, then click Recovery at the bottom of the window. 3.Click Open System Restore, then Next. 4.Click the latest restore point (at a time when your system worked correctly), click Next, then Finish. 5.A confirmation window appears; click Yes. Your system is restored using the restore point you specified. This process may take several minutes, and may restart your computer. Returning your system to its factory condition If your computer experiences problems that are not recoverable by other methods, you may need to reinstall everything to return your system to its factory condition. You can recover from either your hard drive or the recovery backup you have created. If you can still run Windows and have not deleted the recovery partition, see Recovering from Windows on page 26. If you cannot run Windows, your original hard drive has been completely re-formatted or you have installed a replacement hard drive, see Recovering from a recovery backup on page 29. Recovering from Windows Start Acer Recovery Management:

From Start, type Recovery and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. Two options are available, Restore Factory Settings (Reset my PC) or Customized Restore (Refresh my PC). Recovery - 27 Restore Factory Settings deletes everything on your hard drive, then reinstalls Windows and all software and drivers that were pre-installed on your system. If you can access important files on your hard drive, back them up now. See Restore Factory Settings with Acer Recovery Management on page 27. Customized Restore will attempt to retain your files (user data) but will reinstall all software and drivers. Software installed since you purchased your PC will be removed (except software installed from the Windows Store). See Customized Restore with Acer Recovery Management on page 29. Restore Factory Settings with Acer Recovery Management 1.Click Restore Factory Settings. Important Restore Factory Settings will erase all files on your hard drive. 28 - Recovery 2.The Reset your PC window opens. Images for reference only. 3.Click Next, then choose how to erase your files:

a.Just remove my files quickly erases all files before restoring your computer and takes about 30 minutes. b.Fully clean the drive completely cleans the drive after each file is erased, so no files can be viewed after the recovery. Cleaning the drive takes much longer, up to 5 hours, but is much more secure as old files are completely removed. 4.Click Reset. 5.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. 6.After the recovery has finished, you can start using your computer by repeating the first-start process. Recovering from the hard drive during startup 1.Turn on your computer and press <Alt> + <F10> during startup. A screen appears asking you to choose the keyboard layout. 2.Several options are now presented. Click Troubleshoot. 3.Click either Refresh your PC or Reset your PC. Note

"Refresh your PC" enables you to restore your computer to the default factory condition with files intact. "Reset your PC" completely removes all your files and resets your computer to factory settings. 4.Click Next. The process will take several minutes. Customized Restore with Acer Recovery Management 1.Click Customized Restore (Retain User Data). Recovery - 29 2.The Refresh your PC window opens. Images for reference only. 3.Click Next, then Refresh. 4.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. This process takes about 30 minutes. Recovering from a recovery backup To recover from a recovery backup on a USB drive:

1.Find your recovery backup. 2.If your computer does not have a built-in keyboard, make sure a keyboard is attached to your computer. 3.Plug in the USB drive and turn on your computer. 4.If it is not already enabled, you must enable the F12 Boot Menu:

a. Press <F2> when starting your computer. 30 - Recovery b. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Main menu. c. Press the down key until F12 Boot Menu is selected, press <F5>

to change this setting to Enabled. d. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Exit menu. e. Depending on the type of BIOS your computer uses, select Save Changes and Exit or Exit Saving Changes and press Enter. Select OK or Yes to confirm. f. Your computer will restart. 5.During startup, press <F12> to open the boot menu. The boot menu allows you to select which device to start from, select the USB drive. a. Use your arrow keys to select USB Device, then press Enter. b. Windows starts from the recovery backup instead of the normal startup process. 6.Select your keyboard type. 7.Select Troubleshoot and then choose the type of recovery to use:

a. Click Advanced then System Restore to start Microsoft System Restore:

Microsoft System Restore periodically takes a snapshot of your system settings and saves them as restore points. In most cases of hard-to-resolve software problems, you can return to one of these restore points to get your system running again. b. Click Reset your PC to start the reset process:

Reset your PC deletes everything on your hard drive, then reinstalls Windows and all software and drivers that were pre-

installed on your system. If you can access important files on your hard drive, back them up now. See Reset your PC from the recovery backup on page 31. c. Click Refresh your PC to start the refresh process:

Refresh your PC will attempt to retain your files (user data) but will reinstall all software and drivers. Software installed since you purchased your PC will be removed (except software installed from the Windows Store). See Refresh your PC from the recovery backup on page 32. Recovery - 31 Reset your PC from the recovery backup Important Reset your PC will erase all files on your hard drive. 1.The Reset your PC window opens. Images for reference only. 2.Click Next. 3.Select the operating system to recover (normally only one option is available). 4.Choose to keep any changes to the hard drive:

a. If you have deleted the recovery partition or otherwise changed the partitions on the hard drive and want to keep these changes, select No. b. To completely restore your computer to Factory Settings, select Yes. 5.Choose how to erase your files:

a.Just remove my files quickly erases all files before restoring your computer and takes about 30 minutes. b.Fully clean the drive completely cleans the drive after each file is erased, so no files can be viewed after the recovery. Cleaning the drive takes much longer, up to 5 hours, but is much more secure as old files are completely removed. 6.Click Reset. 7.After the recovery has finished, you can start using your computer by repeating the first-start process. 32 - Recovery Refresh your PC from the recovery backup 1.The Refresh your PC window opens. 2.Click Next. 3.Select the operating system to recover (normally only one option is available). 4.Click Refresh. 5.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. This process takes about 30 minutes. CONNECTING TO THE INTERNET Connecting to the Internet - 33 This chapter includes basic information on types of connections, and getting connected to the Internet. For detailed information, please refer to Network connections on page 86. Connecting with a cable Built-in network feature The built-in network feature makes it easy for you to connect your computer to the Internet using a cable. But first, an Internet Service Provider (ISP) -- usually a phone or cable company -- will have to go to your home or office to set up Internet service. The ISP will install a small box, called a router, that will allow you to connect to the Internet. Once your router is set up, all you have to do is plug one end of a network cable into the network port on your computer, and the other end into a port on your router. (Refer to the image below.) Then, you'll be ready to get online. Connecting wirelessly Connecting to a wireless LAN A wireless LAN (or WLAN) is a wireless local area network, which can link two or more computers without using wires. Once connected to 34 - Connecting to the Internet WLAN, you can access the Internet. You can also share files, other devices, and even your Internet connection itself. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft may be prohibited. All wireless devices must be switched off before boarding an aircraft and during take-off, as they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. You may turn on your computers wireless devices only when informed that it is safe to do so by the cabin crew. Your computer's wireless connection is turned on by default and Windows will detect and display a list of available networks during setup. Select your network and enter the password if required. Acer notebook computers feature an Airplane mode hotkey that turns the network connection on or off. You can use the network management options to turn your wireless network on/off or control what is shared over the network. From the Start screen, start typing wireless then select Connect to a network or Change Wi-Fi settings. Otherwise, open the instructions. Internet Explorer and follow Note Please refer to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or router documentation for details on connecting to the Internet. Connecting to a 3G network If your computer has a SIM slot, you can connect to the Internet using a 3G (cellular phone) network. To do this, you must have a compatible SIM card and a data contract with your cellular provider. Note Please contact your cellular provider for details on connecting to the Internet via 3G. USING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION Using a Bluetooth connection - 35 Bluetooth is a technology enabling you to transfer data wirelessly over short distances between many different types of devices. Bluetooth-

enabled devices include computers, cell phones, tablets, wireless headsets, and keyboards. To use Bluetooth, you must ensure the following:

1.Bluetooth is enabled on both devices. 2.Your devices are "paired" (or connected). Enabling and disabling Bluetooth The Bluetooth adapter must be enabled on both devices. For your computer, this may be an external switch, a software setting, or a separate Bluetooth dongle plugged into the computers USB port (if no internal Bluetooth adapter is available). Note Please check your devices owners manual to determine how to turn on its Bluetooth adapter. Enabling Bluetooth from Windows 8 Bluetooth on your computer is disabled by default. To enable your computers Bluetooth adapter, do the following:

1.Open the Charms and select Settings > Change PC Settings >

Wireless, or press the Windows key + <W> and then type Wireless; in the results, click on Wireless. 2.Click the toggle next to Bluetooth to enable/disable it. 3.Then, from the desktop notification area, click the Bluetooth icon, and select Open Settings. 36 - Using a Bluetooth connection 4.Select the Allow Bluetooth devices to find this computer check box, click Apply, and then click OK. Adding a Bluetooth device Every new device must first be "paired" with your computers Bluetooth adapter. This means it must first be authenticated for security purposes. You only need to pair once. After that, simply turning on the Bluetooth adapter of both devices will connect them. From the notification area, click the Bluetooth icon, and select Add a Bluetooth Device. Click on the device you want to add. Using a Bluetooth connection - 37 A code displays on your computer, which should match the code displayed on your device. Select Yes. Then, accept the pairing from your device. Note Some devices using older versions of the Bluetooth technology require both devices to enter a PIN. In the case of one of the devices not having any inputs

(as in a headset), the passcode is hardcoded into the device (usually "0000"

or "1234"). Consult your devices user manual for more information. Your device will show up in the list of devices if it was successfully paired. Open the Control Panel and under Hardware and Sound 38 - Using a Bluetooth connection click on View devices and printers. Right click on your device and select Advanced Operations > Connect to operation window. The operation window enables you to play music and audio from your device through your computer, send files to your device and change Bluetooth settings. ACER TOUCH TOOLS Acer Touch Tools - 39 Acer Touch Tools makes using your Windows device easier and more convenient. You can select, drag or tap on small items in the user interface. You can run Acer Touch Tools, from Start or from the Desktop taskbar. Touch tool controls The Touch Tools control panel has several icons:

Move: Tap the Move tab and drag the Touch Tools panel to reposition it. AccuFinger: Displays or hides the AccuFinger pointer. Tap the icon to display the pointer, and again to hide it. The AccuFinger pointer will also hide automatically after a specified number of seconds, which you can set in the configuration window. Multi-select: Turns the multi-select feature on and off. Tap the multi-

select icon to turn it on. Tap it again to turn multi-select off. ESC simulation: Tap on the ESC icon to send an Escape command to the system. Touch Tools configuration: Tap the gear icon to bring up the Touch Tools configuration window, where you can set the AccuFinger pointer size and timeout. You can also select either right or left-hand operation, which optimizes pointer orientation for the selected mode. Acer Screen Grasp: Tap this icon to run the Acer Screen Grasp utility. See Acer Screen Grasp on page 45. Close: Tap the X to close Acer Touch Tools. Both AccuFinger and the Touch Tools panel will close. Pointing The AccuFinger pointer's fine tip allows you to work with even very small screen elements. This can be particularly helpful when using operating system setting and configuration windows with small buttons, boxes or other small items. 40 - Acer Touch Tools Using AccuFinger With AccuFinger you can:

Point: Place your fingertip on the pointer pad and drag it around. The pointer direction changes automatically as you move around the screen. Select: Perform all standard touch screen cursor commands including tap, double-tap, drag, and drag-select, etc. Drag: To drag something, position the AccuFinger pointer on it, press briefly on the pointer pad to activate drag mode, then drag the selected item to a new position. Display: Display a context-sensitive menu by holding your fingertip on the pointer pad for a moment until the menu appears, then stop touching the pad and select a menu command. Text edit: You can select text in supported programs by tapping on a word or text block to select it or insert the cursor. You can then type or perform other operations on the selected text. RepliView Your touch devices onscreen virtual keyboard can sometimes block your view of where you are typing. RepliView displays a small pop-up window above the onscreen keyboard that displays a view of where you are typing so that you can see what you are doing. This feature operates automatically when Touch Tools is running. ACER MEMORYBINDER Acer MemoryBinder - 41 Acer MemoryBinder is a convenient tool that helps you to arrange and annotate photos into eye-catching binders that you can share with friends and family. You can also export the binders as images. To launch Acer MemoryBinder tap the MemoryBinder tile on the Start screen. You will be presented with any books that you have created;

tap any book to open the book. Getting started Once you have launched Acer MemoryBinder, tap the screen to create your first book. You will be asked to select the book cover, paper template and you have the chance to name the book. Once you have completed these settings, click OK. Enter book title Select cover image Select paper template Your book will be created and shown on the main screen. 42 - Acer MemoryBinder Tap the book to open it. Assemble your binder Once you have your book open, you can add more pages, change the books appearance, or export the book. 1.Tap any page to open it. Add page Export book Change settings 2.Tap the import icon and select the source of the images that you wish to import. 3.Select the image from the dialog box that opens. Once youve selected the image, you can crop it, rotate it, resize it or perform a number of other functions on it. Acer MemoryBinder - 43 4.You can also add text, or sketches by selecting the appropriate tool from the bottom of the page. 44 - Acer MemoryBinder 5.Tap and hold any tool to view the tools options. Note If you are using the optional Active Pen, the Disable Fingertouch tool disables sketching using your finger, to avoid adding undesired sketches when your finger touches the screen. 6.Tap Recorder to add a voice memo to your book. You will be asked to give Acer MemoryBinder access to your devices microphone before you can add a voice memo. Exporting your memories You can choose to export an entire book from the main screen as a series of images or a video clip, or you can export individual pages from a book as images. ACER SCREEN GRASP Acer Screen Grasp - 45 Acer Screen Grasp is a handy screen capture tool that allows you to capture all or part of anything thats displayed on your computers screen. It works for both the desktop and Start screen applications. To launch Acer Screen Grasp, press <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <PrtSc>. Once you have opened the application you can activate the launch gesture: Tapping the screen with three fingers. Note The three-finger gesture is disabled by default. You can enable it from Settings. Overview 1 2 3 4 5 6 The toolbar at the top of the screen allows you to change screen capture options and settings. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Capture: Capture a rectangular or circular area of the screen. Freeform capture: Capture a freeform part of the screen. Window capture: Capture all or part of an open window. Webpage capture: Capture a whole webpage, including parts of the page that are not currently visible. Full screen capture: Capture the full screen. Settings: Change the defaults. 46 - Acer Screen Grasp Adjusting the Settings Tap the Settings icon to adjust the defaults for Acer Screen Grasp. You can enable or disable the launch gesture (tap the screen with three fingers), set the app to launch the editing tool after capturing, pin the program to the taskbar, view a short introduction tutorial, or view the Help content. The editing tool After youve captured the screen, you can edit the image. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 Description Undo. Redo. Pencil tool. No. 1 2 3 Acer Screen Grasp - 47 No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Description Marker tool. Text tool. Eraser. Mosaic effect. Lasso tool. Share capture to... Windows clipboard Facebook Acer Scrapboard Word PowerPoint Outlook Save. Pin/unpin the toolbars. 48 - Acer Scrapboard ACER SCRAPBOARD Acer Scrapboard is a useful tool to manage your screen captures. Screen captures are automatically sorted by date. Tap the Explorer. icon on the screen capture to open the website in Internet You can also create tags to assist in sorting your images. 1.Tap and drag an image down to open the menu at the bottom of the screen. 2.Tap Create tag to create a tag. 3.Tap Tags to open the list of available tags, and check each tag that you would like to assign to the image.

- 49 Keeping your computer and data safe... In this section you will find:

How to secure your computer Setting passwords What you need to prepare when youre traveling How to get the most out of your battery 50 - BIOS utility BIOS UTILITY The BIOS utility is a hardware configuration program built into your computer's BIOS. Your computer is already properly configured and optimized, and you do not normally need to run this utility. However, if you encounter configuration problems, you may need to run it. To activate the BIOS utility, press <F2> during the POST while the computer logo is being displayed. Boot sequence To set the boot sequence in the BIOS utility, activate the BIOS utility, then select Boot from the categories listed at the top of the screen. Setting passwords To set a password on boot, activate the BIOS utility, then select Security from the categories listed at the top of the screen. Find Password on boot: and use the <F5> and <F6> keys to enable this feature. SECURING YOUR COMPUTER Securing your computer - 51 Your computer is a valuable investment that you need to take care of. Learn how to protect and take care of your computer. Security features include hardware and software locks a security notch and passwords. Using a computer security lock The computer comes with a Kensington-compatible security slot for a security lock. Wrap a computer security lock cable around an immovable object such as a table or handle of a locked drawer. Insert the lock into the notch and turn the key to secure the lock. Some keyless models are also available. Using passwords Passwords protect your computer from unauthorized access. Setting these passwords creates several different levels of protection for your computer and data:

Supervisor Password prevents unauthorized entry into the BIOS utility. Once set, you must enter this password to gain access to the BIOS utility. See Setting passwords on page 50. User Password secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. Password on Boot secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. Important Do not forget your Supervisor Password! If you forget your password, please get in touch with your dealer or an authorized service center. 52 - Securing your computer Entering passwords When a password is set, a password prompt appears in the center of the display screen. When the Supervisor Password is set, a prompt appears when you enter the BIOS utility. Type the Supervisor Password and press <Enter> to access the BIOS utility. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press <Enter>. When the User Password is set and the password on boot parameter is enabled, a prompt appears at boot-up. Type the User Password and press <Enter> to use the computer. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press <Enter>. Important You have three chances to enter a password. If you fail to enter the password correctly after three tries, the system halts. Press and hold the power button for four seconds to shut down the computer. Then turn on the computer again, and try again. POWER MANAGEMENT Power management - 53 This computer has a built-in power management unit that monitors system activity. System activity refers to any activity involving one or more of following devices: keyboard, mouse, hard disk, peripherals connected to the computer, and video memory. If no activity is detected for a period of time, the computer stops some or all of these devices in order to conserve energy. the Saving power Disable Fast startup Your computer uses Fast startup to start quickly, but also uses a small amount of power to check for signals to start. These checks will slowly drain your computers battery. If you prefer to reduce your computers power requirements and environmental impact, turn off Fast startup:

Note If Fast startup is off, your computer will take longer to start from Sleep. Your computer will also not start if it receives an instruction to start over a network (Wake on LAN). 1.Open the desktop. 2.Click Power Options in the Notification area. 3.Select More Power Options. 4.Select Choose what the power buttons do. 54 - Power management 5.To access Shutdown Settings, select Change settings that are currently unavailable. 6.Scroll down and disable Turn on fast startup. 7.Select Save changes. BATTERY PACK Battery pack - 55 The computer uses an embedded Lithium battery that gives you long use between charges. Battery characteristics The battery is recharged whenever you connect the computer to the AC adapter. Your computer supports charge-in-use, enabling you to recharge the battery while you continue to operate the computer. However, recharging with the computer turned off significantly reduces charge time. The battery will come in handy when you travel or during a power failure. Charging the battery Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and connect to a mains power outlet. You can continue to operate your computer on AC power while your battery is charging. However, charging the battery with the computer turned off significantly reduces charge time. Note You are advised to charge the battery before retiring for the day. Charging the battery overnight before traveling enables you to start the next day with a fully charged battery. Conditioning a new battery pack Before you use a battery pack for the first time, there is a conditioning process that you should follow:

1.Connect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery. 2.Turn on the computer and complete setting up the operating system. 3.Disconnect the AC adapter. 4.Operate the computer using battery power. 5.Reconnect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery again. Follow these steps again until the battery has been charged and discharged three times. 56 - Battery pack Use this conditioning process for all new batteries, or if a battery hasn't been used for a long time. Warning Do not expose battery packs to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Extreme temperatures may adversely affect the battery pack. The battery conditioning process ensures your battery accepts the maximum possible charge. Failure to follow this procedure will prevent you from obtaining the maximum battery charge, and will also shorten the effective lifespan of the battery. In addition, the useful lifespan of the battery is adversely affected by the following usage patterns:

Using the computer on constant AC power. Not discharging and recharging the battery to its extremes, as described above. Frequent use; the more you use the battery, the faster it will reach the end of its effective life. An embedded battery has a life span of more than 1,000 charge/discharge cycles. Optimizing battery life Optimizing battery life helps you get the most out of battery operation, prolonging the charge/recharge cycle and improving recharging efficiency. You are advised to follow the suggestions set out below:

Use AC power whenever possible, reserving battery for mobile use. Remove accessories that are not being used (e.g. a USB disk drive), as they can continue to draw power. Store your PC in a cool, dry place. The recommended temperature is 10 C (50 F) to 30 C (86 F). Higher temperatures cause the battery to self-discharge faster. Excessive recharging decreases the battery life. Look after your AC adapter and battery. Checking the battery level The power meter indicates the current battery level. Rest the cursor over the battery/power icon on the taskbar to see the battery's present charge level. Battery pack - 57 Battery-low warning When using battery power pay attention to the power meter. Important Connect the AC adapter as soon as possible after the battery-low warning appears. Data may be lost if the battery is allowed to become fully depleted and the computer shuts down. When the battery-low warning appears, the recommended course of action depends on your situation:

Situation The AC adapter and a power outlet are available. The AC adapter or a power outlet is unavailable. Recommended Action 1. Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and then connect to the main power supply. 2. Save all necessary files. 3. Resume work. Turn off the computer if you want to recharge the battery rapidly. 1. Save all necessary files. 2. Close all applications. 3. Turn off the computer. 58 - Traveling with your computer TRAVELING WITH YOUR COMPUTER This section gives you tips and hints to consider when moving around or traveling with your computer. Disconnecting from the desktop Follow these steps to disconnect your computer from external accessories:

1.Save any open files. 2.Remove discs from optical drive. 3.Shut down the computer or put it into Sleep or Hibernate mode. 4.Close the display cover. 5.Disconnect the cord from the AC adapter. 6.Disconnect the keyboard, pointing device, printer, external monitor and other external devices. 7.Disconnect the Kensington lock if you are using one to secure the computer. Moving around When you are just moving within short distances, for example, from your office desk to a meeting room. Preparing the computer Before moving the computer, close and latch the display cover to place it in Sleep mode. You can now safely take the computer anywhere you go within the building. To wake the computer from Sleep mode, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. If you are taking the computer to a client's office or a different building, you may choose to shut down the computer:

Press the Windows key + <C>, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down Or:

Traveling with your computer - 59 You can put the computer in Sleep mode by pressing <Fn> + <F4> or by closing the display. When you are ready to use the computer again, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. Note The computer may enter Hibernation or Deep Sleep mode after being in Sleep mode for a period of time. What to bring to meetings If your meeting is relatively short, you probably do not need to bring anything with you other than your computer. If your meeting will be longer, or if your battery is not fully charged, you may want to bring the AC adapter with you to plug in your computer in the meeting room. If the meeting room does not have an electrical outlet, reduce the drain on the battery by putting the computer in Sleep mode. Press

<Fn> + <F4> or close the display cover whenever you are not actively using the computer. Taking the computer home When you are moving from your office to your home or vice versa. Preparing the computer After disconnecting the computer from your desktop, follow these steps to prepare the computer for the trip home:

Check that you have removed all media and compact discs from the drive(s). Failure to remove the media can damage the drive head. Pack the computer in a protective case that can prevent the computer from sliding around and cushion it if it should fall. Warning Avoid packing items next to the top cover of the computer. Pressure against the top cover can damage the screen. 60 - Traveling with your computer What to take with you Unless you have some items at home, take the following items with you:

AC adapter and power cord. The printed Setup Guide. Special considerations Follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling to and from work:

Minimize the effects of temperature changes by keeping the computer with you. If you need to stop for an extended period of time and cannot carry the computer with you, leave the computer in the trunk of the car to avoid exposing the computer to excessive heat. Changes in temperature and humidity can cause condensation. Allow the computer to return to room temperature, and inspect the screen for condensation before turning on the computer. If the temperature change is greater than 10 C (18 F), allow the computer to come to room temperature slowly. If possible, leave the computer for 30 minutes in an environment with a temperature between outside and room temperature. Setting up a home office If you frequently work on your computer at home, you may want to purchase a second AC adapter for use at home. With a second AC adapter, you can avoid carrying the extra weight to and from home. If you use your computer at home for significant periods of time, you might also want to add an external keyboard, monitor or mouse. Traveling with the computer Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. When you are moving within a larger distance, for instance, from your office building to a client's office building or traveling locally. Traveling with your computer - 61 Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as if you were taking it home. Make sure that the battery in the computer is charged. Airport security may require you to turn on your computer when carrying it into the gate area. What to take with you Take the following items with you:

AC adapter Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer Special considerations In addition to the guidelines for taking the computer home, follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling:

Always take the computer as carry-on luggage. If possible, have the computer inspected by hand. Airport security X-

ray machines are safe, but do not put the computer through a metal detector. Traveling internationally with the computer Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. When you are moving from country to country. Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as you would normally prepare it for traveling. 62 - Traveling with your computer What to bring with you Bring the following items with you:

AC adapter. Power cords that are appropriate for your destination(s). Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer. Proof of purchase, in case you need to show it to customs officials. International Travelers Warranty passport. Special considerations Follow the same special considerations as when traveling with the computer. In addition, these tips are useful when traveling internationally:

When traveling in another country, check that the local AC voltage and the AC adapter power cord specifications are compatible. If not, purchase a power cord that is compatible with the local AC voltage. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power the computer. If you are using the modem, check if the modem and connector are compatible with the telecommunications system of the country you are traveling in.

- 63 Ports and connectors... In this section you will find:

Information on the ports and connectors fitted to your computer 64 - Acer Converter Port ACER CONVERTER PORT Note There are different cables available. Please check with your retailer to see which are compatible with your computer. The Acer Converter Port is a proprietary port that allows you to extend the connectivity options of your computer using a single cable. The Acer Converter Port supports one or more of the following through a dedicated cable: A LAN connection, an external display

(VGA) port and an additional USB port. You may connect more than one peripheral to the Acer Converter cable that is compatible with your computer. MEMORY CARD READER Memory card reader - 65 Connectivity options Your computer has a card reader and other ports/jacks that allow you to connect peripheral devices to your computer. For instructions on how to connect different external devices to the computer, read the following section. Memory card reader Memory cards are used in a wide selection of digital cameras, PDAs, MP3 players and mobile phones. Inserting a memory card 1.Align the card so that the connector points towards the port, with the connectors facing down. 2.Carefully slide the card into the port. If you find you need to use any force to insert the card, try reorientating the card slightly. 3.Push the card until it clicks into place. A few millimetres of the card will extend from beyond the slot. If the card contains some files, the Windows Auto Play window may appear (this depends on the contents of the card) and ask you if you wish to use a program to access the contents of the card. Select an option here if it is appropriate, otherwise select Cancel. If the card contains no files, or unknown files, a window will open showing the contents of the card. SD, SDHC and SDXC cards Different types of SD cards cover different capacities, while using the same overall design. SD cards contain up to 4 GB, SDHC cards contain up to 32 GB, and SDXC cards can contain up to 2048 GB (2 66 - Memory card reader TB). Your computer provides an SDHC or SDXC compatible card reader. Note SDXC memory cards can only be used in an SDXC-compatible reader; SD and SDHC cards can be used in either type. Removing a card from a memory card reader 1.Click on Show hidden icons arrow in the Notification Area (next to the clock). 2 2.Click on the Safely Remove Hardware icon. 3.Click on Eject SD Card (or the name of the device). 4.Wait until a Safe to Remove Hardware message is displayed. 5.Remove the card. 1 3 VIDEO AND AUDIO CONNECTORS Video and audio connectors - 67 Connect to a monitor with a VGA or DVI port (the type of connection supported depends on your computers configuration). The appropriate cable is usually included with the monitor. Follow these steps to connect an monitor to your computer:

1.Check that the computer is powered off and the monitor power switch is turned off. 2.Attach the video cable to the monitor port on the computer. Secure the cable connection with the screws provided. 3.Connect the monitor power cable and plug it into a properly grounded wall outlet. 4.Follow any setup instructions in the monitor's user's guide. 5.Turn on power to the monitor, then the computer. 6.Make sure that the current resolution and refresh rate do not exceed the specifications of the monitor. If necessary change the display settings used by the computer. Note To access the display controls, press the Windows key (

"Display" and then click on Display.

) + W, type Headphones and microphone These ports allow you to connect audio devices. Use the headphone port to plug in stereo headphones or powered speakers. Plugging an audio device to the headphone port disables the built-in speakers. Use the microphone port to connect an external microphone for mono recording; plugging in an external microphone disables the built-in microphone. Note Some computers have a single "combo" port that allows you to use single-pin headsets with a built-in microphone. These headsets are most commonly used with smartphones. 68 - HDMI HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a high-quality, digital audio/video interface. HDMI allows you to connect any compatible digital audio/video source, such as your computer, a set-top box, DVD player, and audio/video receiver to any compatible digital audio and/or video monitor, such as a digital television (DTV) with a single cable. The single cable keeps everything neat and tidy while ensuring easy connection and the best audio and visual quality. UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB) Universal Serial Bus (USB) - 69 The USB port is a high-speed port which allows you to connect USB peripherals, such as a mouse, an external keyboard, additional storage (external hard disks), or any other compatible device. Note Two USB standards are currently available on Acer computers: USB 2.0

(High-speed USB) and USB 3.0 (SuperSpeed USB). USB 2.0 ports on Acer computers have a black tongue in the port, while USB 3.0 ports have a blue tongue. For best performance, USB 3.0 devices should always be plugged into USB 3.0 ports. Consult your devices documentation to see which standard it supports. You can also charge devices such as tablets, smartphones, or other devices through a USB port. Some USB 3.0 ports support charging devices when the computer is in Hibernate or turned off. Additionally, you can use a USB hub to connect multiple devices to a single USB port. Important When removing a USB storage device, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <device>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral. 70 -

Got a question?

In this section you will find:

Frequently asked questions Tips for using Windows 8.1 Troubleshooting information How to protect yourself while online Where to find Acer service center contact information FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Frequently asked questions - 71 The following is a list of possible situations that may arise during the use of your computer. Easy solutions are provided for each one. I turned on the power, but the computer does not start or boot up. Look at the power indicator:

If it is not lit, no power is being supplied to the computer. Check the following:

If you are using on the battery, it may be low and unable to power the computer. Connect the AC adapter to recharge the battery pack. Make sure that the AC adapter is properly plugged into the computer and to the power outlet. If it is lit, check the following:

Is a disc in the optical drive? Remove it and press <Ctrl> + <Alt>

+ <Del> to restart the system. Do you have a USB storage device (USB disk or smartphone) plugged into your computer? Unplug it and press <Ctrl> + <Alt> +

<Del> to restart the system. Nothing appears on the screen. The computers power management system automatically blanks the screen to save power. Press any key to turn the display back on. If pressing a key does not turn the display back on, three things might be the cause:

The brightness level might be too low. Press <Fn> + < > (increase) to adjust the brightness level. The display device might be set to an external monitor. Press the display toggle hotkey <Fn> + <F5> to toggle the display back to the computer. If the power LED is flashing, the computer may be in Sleep or Hibernate mode. Press and release the power button to resume. No audio is heard from the computer. Check the following:

72 - Frequently asked questions The volume may be muted. Look at the volume control (speaker) icon in the taskbar. If it is crossed-out, click the icon and deselect the Mute all option. The volume level may be too low. Check the volume from the volume control (speaker) icon in the taskbar. You can also use the volume control buttons to adjust the volume. If headphones, earphones or external speakers are connected to the headphone jack on the computer, the internal speakers automatically turn off. I want to eject the optical drive tray without turning on the power. There is a mechanical eject hole on the optical drive. Simply insert the tip of a pen or straightened-out paperclip into the hole and push to eject the tray. The keyboard does not respond. Try attaching an external keyboard to a USB port on the computer. If it works, contact your dealer or an authorized service center as the internal keyboard cable may be loose. The printer does not work. Check the following:

Make sure that the printer is connected to a power outlet and that it is turned on. Make sure that the printer cable is connected securely to a USB port and the corresponding port on the printer. I want to restore my computer to its original settings. Frequently asked questions - 73 Note If your system is the multilingual version, the operating system and language you choose when you first turn on the system will be the only option for future recovery operations. This recovery process helps you restore the C: drive with the original software content that is installed when you purchased your computer. Warning Your C: drive will be reformatted and all data will be erased. It is important to back up all data files before using this option. Before performing a restore operation, please check the BIOS settings. 1.Check to see if Acer disk-to-disk recovery is enabled or not. 2.Make sure the D2D Recovery setting in Main is Enabled. 3.Exit the BIOS utility and save changes. The system will reboot. Note To activate the BIOS utility, press <F2> when you see the Acer logo during boot up. For detailed information on the recovery process, <cross-reference to Recovery chapter>. Requesting service International Travelers Warranty (ITW) Your computer is backed by an International Travelers Warranty

(ITW) that gives you security and peace of mind when traveling. An ITW passport came with your computer. This passport contains all you need to know about the ITW program. A list of available, authorized service centers is in this handy booklet. Read this passport thoroughly. Always have your ITW passport on hand, especially when you travel, to receive the benefits from our support centers. Attach your proof-of-

purchase to the ITW passport. 74 - Frequently asked questions If the country you are traveling in does not have an Acer-authorized ITW service site, you can still get in contact with our offices worldwide. Please visit www.acer.com. Before you call Please have the following information available when you call Acer for online service, and please be at your computer when you call. With your support, we can reduce the amount of time a call takes and help solve your problems efficiently. If there are error messages or beeps reported by your computer, write them down as they appear on the screen (or the number and sequence in the case of beeps). You are required to provide the following information:

Name: _______________________________________ Address: ______________________________________ Telephone number: _____________________________ Machine and model type: _________________________ Serial number: _________________________________ Date of purchase: ______________________________ Frequently ask Frequently asked questions - 75 Tips and hints for using Windows 8 We know this is a new operating system that will take some getting used to, so we've created a few pointers to help you get started. How do I get to Start?

Press the Windows key; tap the Start button on the desktop taskbar;

or swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap the Start charm. Wheres the Start button?

The Start button will appear in the desktop taskbar. Tapping it will open Start where you can launch apps. How do I see all of my apps?

Swipe upwards from the bottom of Start. Can I make the "All apps" view the default for Start?

Yes, you can, just follow these steps:

1.Go to the desktop. 2.Tap and hold the taskbar until you see the square outline. Select Properties from the menu that opens when you remove your finger. 3.From the Navigation tab, check Show the Apps view automatically when I go to Start. What are "Charms?"

Charms allow you to perform useful functions, such as sharing content, turning off your PC or changing settings. How do I access the charms?

Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards. 76 - Frequently asked questions Can I boot directly to the desktop?

Yes, you can, just follow these steps:

1.Go to the desktop. 2.Tap and hold the taskbar until you see the square outline. Select Properties from the menu that opens when you remove your finger. 3.From the Navigation tab, check Go to the desktop instead of Start when I sign in. How do I jump between apps?

Swipe the left-hand edge of the screen inwards to cycle through apps that are currently running. How do I turn off my computer?

Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards, tap Settings >

Power and select the action you'd like to take. Alternatively, from the desktop, tap Acer Power Button and select the action you'd like to take. Can I just turn off notifications?

You can turn off notifications during certain hours so that you can leave your computer running, but not be disturbed by notifications. 1.Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings >

Change PC settings > Search & apps > Notifications. 2.Move the Quiet hours slider to On and select times to start and stop disabling notifications. How do I unlock my computer?

Swipe the lock screen upwards and tap a user account icon to unlock the computer. If your account has a password set, you will need to enter the password to continue. Tap and hold the preview icon to see the characters you've entered to ensure the password is correct. Frequently asked questions - 77 Can I personalize the Lock screen?

You can personalize the lock screen with a different image, to run a slideshow of images, or to show you quick status and notifications to suit your personal needs. To change the background, swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings > Change PC settings > PC & devices >

Lock screen. From here you can:

Select a background image for the lock screen Turn the Slide show on or off Select lock screen apps. How do I set up the lock screen slideshow?

1.Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings >

Change PC settings > PC & devices > Lock screen. 2.Move the slider to On and select if the slideshow should be played while the computer is running on battery power. 3.Tap Add a folder and open the folder you wish to use (your Pictures folder will open by default). Tap Use this folder > OK. 4.You can see the list of folders under Add a folder. Select a folder name and tap Remove to remove the folder from the lock screen slideshow. 5.Change the other settings to suit your needs. How do I personalize my computer?

You can personalize Start with a different background image or by arranging the tiles to suit your personal needs. To change the background, swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings > Change PC settings > Personalize. Tap Start screen at the top of the page and select a color and image. How do I set the alarm?

Your computer can act as an alarm clock. Start typing Alarms to search for the Alarms app. 1.Set the time using the sliders on the left-hand side of the screen. 2.Select AM or PM. 78 - Frequently asked questions 3.Choose which days the alarm should go off. 4.Select the notification. 5.Save the alarm by tapping the Save icon in the upper right-hand corner. Delete Save Hour Minutes Note The alarm will only sound if your computer is awake at the set time. How do I move tiles?

Tap and hold a tile to select it, then drag it to the place on Start that you want it to appear. Other tiles will be moved to accommodate the tile in its new location. Can I arrange tiles in groups?

Yes, you can. Tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. You will see Name group appear above unnamed groups. You can give the group(s) a name and arrange the tiles within the groups to suit your needs. Can I make tiles bigger or smaller?

Swipe upwards from bottom of the screen and tap Customize, tap the tile(s) you wish to resize and tap Resize. Select a size from the menu that appears. Frequently asked questions - 79 How do I close an app?

Swipe the window downwards from the top to the bottom of the screen. You need to swipe the window past the half-way point of the screen. Can I change the screen resolution?

Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Search, tap the text box to open the onscreen keyboard and start typing 'Control Panel' to display the results; tap Control Panel > Adjust screen resolution. Where are my apps?

Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Search, type the name of the app you would like to open using the pop-up keyboard. Results will be displayed on the left-hand side of the screen. To view the complete list of apps, swipe upwards from the bottom of the screen and tap All apps. How do I make an app appear on Start?

If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on Start, Tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. Tap Pin to Start from the menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. How do I remove a tile from Start?

Tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. Tap the tile(s) you wish to remove and tap Unpin from Start from the menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. How do I make an app appear on my taskbar?

If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on the taskbar, tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. Select Pin to taskbar from the menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. 80 - Frequently asked questions How do I install apps?

You can download Windows Store apps from Store. You will need to have a Microsoft ID to purchase and download apps from Store. I can't find apps like Notepad and Paint! Where are they?

Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Search, type the name of the app you would like to open using the pop-up keyboard. Alternatively, open All apps and scroll to Windows Accessories to see the list of legacy programs. Can I use more than one app at a time?

1.Tap on a tile to open an app from the Start screen. 2.Return to the Start screen and repeat the process. 3.Swipe right from the left edge of the screen to display the last app that was opened. 4.Swipe right from the left edge of the screen until you see a column divider to display both apps simultaneously. Up to three apps may be displayed via three columns at the same time. Note This function is limited to devices with a screen resolution higher than 1366 x 768 pixels. Can I show my desktop apps first?

Yes, you can, just follow these steps:

1.Go to the desktop. 2.Tap and hold the taskbar until you see the square outline. Select Properties from the menu that opens when you remove your finger. 3.From the Navigation tab, check List desktop apps first in the Apps view when it's sorted by category. What is a Microsoft ID (account)?

A Microsoft account is an email address and password that you use to sign in to Windows. You can use any email address, but it is best if you choose the one you already use to communicate with friends and sign in to your favorite websites. When you sign in to your PC with a Frequently asked questions - 81 Microsoft account, you'll connect your PC to the people, files, and devices you care about. Do I need one?

You do not need a Microsoft ID to use Windows 8, but it makes life easier because you can sync data across different machines you sign in to using a Microsoft ID. How do I get one?

If you've already installed Windows 8 and didn't sign in with a Microsoft account or you don't have a Microsoft account and want to get one, swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings > Change PC settings > Accounts > Connect to a Microsoft account, and follow the onscreen instructions. How do I add a favorite to Internet Explorer?

Internet Explorer 10 doesn't have traditional favorites, instead you can pin shortcuts to Start. Once you have the page open, swipe upwards from the bottom edge of the screen to open the menu at the bottom of the screen. Tap Pin to Start. How do I check for Windows updates?

Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings >

Change PC settings > Update & recovery > Windows Update. Tap Check now. Where can I get more information?

For more information please visit the following pages:

Windows 8 tutorials: www.acer.com/windows8-tutorial Support FAQs: www.acer.com/support FREQUENTLY 82 - Frequently asked questions Troubleshooting This chapter shows you how to deal with common system problems. Read it before calling a technician if a problem occurs. Solutions to more serious problems require opening up the computer. Do not attempt to open the computer yourself; contact your dealer or authorized service center for assistance. Troubleshooting tips incorporates an advanced design This computer onscreen error message reports to help you solve problems. If the system reports an error message or an error symptom occurs, see "Error messages" below. If the problem cannot be resolved, contact your dealer. See Error messages on page 82. that delivers Error messages Corrective action If you receive an error message, note the message and take the corrective action. The following table lists the error messages in alphabetical order together with the recommended course of action. Error messages CMOS battery bad Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service CMOS checksum error center. Insert a system (bootable) disk, then press Disk boot failure

<Enter> to reboot. Press <F2> (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Hard disk 0 error Hard disk 0 extended type error I/O parity error Equipment configuration error Frequently asked questions - 83 Error messages Keyboard error or no keyboard connected Keyboard interface error Memory size mismatch Corrective action Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Press <F2> (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. If you still encounter problems after going through the corrective measures, please contact your dealer or an authorized service center for assistance. 84 - Internet and online security INTERNET AND ONLINE SECURITY First steps on the net Protecting your computer It is vital to protect your computer from viruses and attacks over the Internet (see Security on page 88). A comprehensive Internet security program is offered when you first start your computer. You should activate this protection as soon as possible, certainly before you connect to the Internet. Choose an Internet Service Provider Using the Internet has become a natural part of daily computing. Just a few simple steps can connect you to a vast collection of knowledge and communication tools. To accomplish these steps you should first select an Internet Service Provider (ISP), which supplies the connection between your computer and the Internet. You should research the ISPs available in your region, not forgetting to talk to friends and family about their experiences or to check reviews and consumer reports. The ISP you select will provide instructions on how to connect to the Internet (you may need additional software or a special box that connects to your phone line). Connection types Depending on your computer model, your location and your communication needs, you have several ways to connect to the Internet. Dial-up Some computers include a telephone dial-up (modem) connector. This allows you to connect to the Internet using your telephone line. With a dial-up connection, you cannot use the modem and the telephone simultaneously on a single phone line. This type of connection is recommended only if you have limited use of the Internet as the connection speed is low and connection time is typically charged per hour. Internet and online security - 85 DSL (e.g. ADSL) DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) is an always-on connection that runs over the phone line. As DSL and phone do not use the same frequencies, you can use your telephone at the same time you are connected to the Internet (this requires a micro-filter on each telephone socket to avoid interference). To be eligible for DSL, you must be located near an DSL-equipped phone exchange (service is sometimes unavailable in rural areas). Connection speeds vary depending on your location, but DSL generally provides very fast and reliable Internet connection. As the connection is always-on, it is generally charged at fixed monthly rates. Note A DSL connection requires an appropriate modem. A modem is usually provided by the ISP when you register. Many of these modems include an router that provides network and Wi-Fi access. Cable A cable connection provides fast and always-on Internet service via a cable television line. This service is generally available in large cities. You can use your telephone and watch cable TV at the same time you are connected to the Internet. 3G (WWAN or 'Wireless Wide-Area Network') A 3G connection allows you to use cellular networks (such as those used by a mobile phone) to connect to the Internet while away from home. The socket for a SIM card may be built in to your computer, or may require an external device, such as a USB modem or even an appropriately equipped mobile phone. Note If your computer includes a SIM card slot, you require a compatible SIM card and a contract with a cellular provider. Before using the 3G features, check with your service provider to see if any additional charges will be incurred, especially roaming charges. 86 - Internet and online security Network connections A LAN (Local Area Network) is a group of computers (for example, within an office building or home) that share a common communications line and resources. When you set up a network, you can share files, peripheral devices (such as a printer) and an Internet connection. You can set up a LAN using wired technologies (such as Ethernet) or wireless technologies (such as Wi-Fi or Bluetooth). Wireless networks A wireless LAN or WLAN is a wireless local area network, which may link two or more computers without using wires. Setting up a wireless network is easy and allows you to share files, peripheral devices and an Internet connection. What are benefits of a wireless network?

Mobility Wireless LAN systems allow you and other users of your home network to share access to files and devices connected to the network, for example a printer or scanner. Also you can share an internet connection with other computers in your home. Installation speed and simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be fast and easy and eliminates the need to pull cables through walls and ceilings. Components of a wireless LAN To set up your Wireless network at home you need to have the following:

Access point (router) Access points (routers) are two-way transceivers that broadcast data into the surrounding environment. Access points act as a mediator between wired and wireless network. Most routers have a built-in DSL modem that will allow you access to a high speed DSL internet connection. The ISP (Internet Service Provider) you have chosen normally supplies a modem/router with the subscription to their Internet and online security - 87 services. Read carefully the documentation supplied with your Access point/router for detailed setup instructions. Network cable (RJ45) A network cable (also called RJ45 cable) is used to connect the host computer to the access point (see illustration below); this type of cable may also be used to connect peripheral devices to the access point. Wireless adapter An internal wireless adapter is normally already installed in your computer. A button or controls in Windows allow you to activate or deactivate the adapter. Diagram of a working network 1.Access point/router 2.Desktop computer 3.Modem 4.Printer 5.Portable computer 6.PDA/Smartphone 7.Network cables (RJ45) Turning on/off a wireless network connection Most computers feature a Wi-Fi button that turns the network connection on or off. If your computer has wireless access, but does not feature a Communication button, you may turn your wireless network on or off, or control what is shared over the network with the network management options. Press the Windows key (

) + W, type

"HomeGroup" and then click on HomeGroup. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off all devices before boarding an aircraft; they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. 88 - Internet and online security Surf the Net!

To surf the Internet, you need a program called an Internet browser. Internet Explorer provides an easy and secure web browsing experience. As soon as you have your Internet access installed and you are connected, from Start, click the Internet Explorer tile or the icon located on the desktop and take your Internet experience to a new level!

Acer website To get you started why not visit our website, www.acer.com. Acer is dedicated to provide you with on-going personalied support. Check out our Support section to get help tailored to your needs. www.acer.com is your portal to a world of online activities and services: visit us regularly for the latest information and downloads!

Security You are probably eager to explore everything the Internet has to offer. In order for you to be safe online, Acer has pre-installed McAfee Internet Security Suiteon your computer. Norton Internet Security runs quietly in the background to block todays complex threats and protect your identity when you shop, bank, or browse online. McAfee Internet Security Suite blocks online identity theft, detects and eliminates spyware, removes viruses and Internet worms, protects against hackers. Definitions What is a virus?

Malicious software, typically called viruses, are programs designed to infect and damage computers. Most viruses are transmitted over the Internet, emails or malicious Web sites. A typical virus will replicate and pass itself undetected to multiple computers. Other forms of nuisance, such as Trojan horses, worms or spam can infect your Internet and online security - 89 computer in various ways, using up resources or clogging up a network. Note Acer guarantees that your computer was 100% virus free at the time of purchase and does not cover damages due to viruses. What is spyware?

Spyware refers to generally unwanted programs that are downloaded onto your computer while connected to the Internet, often without you knowing it. Once it has infected your computer, it can snoop on your browsing activity, collect personal information, cause pop-up ads to appear, or even change the configuration of your computer. Spyware consumes resources on your computer; it can slow down your Internet connection or entire computer system, and even cause crashes. Spyware is sometimes used by unscrupulous companies to monitor and track the sites you visit on the Internet so as to determine your web-surfing habits and display targeted pop-up ads on your screen. However, some kinds of spyware go beyond simple tracking and actually monitor keystrokes and capture passwords, posing a serious security risk. What is malware?

Malicious software, also known as malware, is software designed to deliberately harm your computer. For example, viruses, worms, and Trojan horses are malicious software. To help protect your computer against malware, make sure it is using up-to-date antivirus and anti-

malware software. What is a personal firewall?

A personal firewall is a software program designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a private network. It acts as a shield to protect your Internet connection from unwanted connections, some of which may attempt to take control of your computer to install or re-

distribute viruses or malicious programs. Each connection to your computer is monitored - programs that attempt to receive information without your permission are detected and the firewall will display an alert. You can then decide if you will allow the connection, if the connection is to a program you are currently using then normally you 90 - Internet and online security would allow it (i.e. a game connecting to a multi-player server or an encyclopaedia making a content update). How to protect your computer Cybercrime prevention can be straight-forward - when armed with a little technical advice and common sense, many attacks can be avoided. In general, online criminals are trying to make their money as quickly and easily as possible. The more difficult you make their job, the more likely they are to leave you alone and move on to an easier target. The tips below provide basic information on how you can prevent online fraud. Keep your computer current with the latest patches and updates One of the best ways to keep attackers away from your computer is to apply patches and other software fixes when they become available. By regularly updating your computer, you block attackers from being able to take advantage of software flaws (vulnerabilities) that they could otherwise use to break into your system. While keeping your computer up-to-date will not protect you from all attacks, it makes it much more difficult for hackers to gain access to your system, blocks many basic and automated attacks completely, and might be enough to discourage less-determined attackers, so they will give up and look for a more vulnerable computer elsewhere. More recent versions of Microsoft Windows and other popular software can be configured to download and apply updates automatically so that you do not have to remember to check for the latest software. Taking advantage of auto-update features in your software is a great start toward keeping yourself safe online. Protect your computer with security software Several types of security software are necessary for basic online security. Security software essentials include firewall and antivirus programs. A firewall is usually your computer's first line of defense-it controls who and what can communicate with your computer online. You could think of a firewall as a sort of "policeman" that watches all the data attempting to flow in and out of your computer on the Internet, allowing communications that it knows are safe and blocking

"bad" traffic such as attacks from ever reaching your computer. Internet and online security - 91 The next line of defense many times is your antivirus software, which monitors all online activities such as email messages and Web browsing and protects an individual from viruses, worms, Trojan horse and other types of malicious programs. Your antivirus and antispyware software should be configured to update itself, and it should do so every time you connect to the Internet. Integrated security suites such as McAfee Internet Security Suite, which combine firewall, antivirus, antispyware with other features such as antispam and parental controls, have become popular as they offer all the security software needed for online protection in a single package. Many people find using a comprehensive security suite an attractive alternative to installing, configuring and updating several different types of security software. A complete version of McAfee Internet Security Suite is pre-installed on your Acer system. It includes a free trial subscription to protection updates. Make sure you Activate it!

Choose strong passwords and keep them safe following Passwords are a fact of life on the Internet today; we use them for everything from ordering flowers and online banking to logging into our favorite airline Web site to see how many miles we have accumulated. The tips can help make your online experiences secure:

Selecting a password that cannot be easily guessed is the first step toward keeping passwords secure and out of the wrong hands. Strong passwords have eight characters or more and use a combination of letters, numbers and symbols (e.g., # $ % ! ?). Avoid using any of the following as your password: your login name, anything based on your personal information such as your last name, and words that can be found in the dictionary, especially

"password." Try to select especially strong, unique passwords for protecting activities like online banking. Keep your passwords in a safe place and try not to use the same password for every service you use online. Change passwords on a regular basis, at least every 90 days. This can limit the damage caused by someone who has already gained access to your account. If you notice something suspicious with one 92 - Internet and online security of your online accounts, one of the first steps you can take is to change your password. Protect your personal information Exercise caution when sharing personal information such as your name, home address, phone number, and email address online. To take advantage of many online services, you will inevitably have to provide personal information in order to handle billing and shipping of purchased goods. Since not divulging any personal information is rarely possible, the following list contains some advice for how to share personal information safely online:

Keep an eye out for phony email messages. Things that indicate a message may be fraudulent are misspellings, poor grammar, odd phrasing, Web site addresses with strange extensions, Web site addresses that are entirely numbers where there are normally words, and anything else out of the ordinary. Additionally, phishing messages will often tell you that you have to act quickly to keep your account open, update your security, or urge you to provide information immediately or else something bad will happen. Don't take the bait. Don't respond to email messages that ask for personal information. Legitimate companies will not use email messages to ask for your personal information. When in doubt, contact the company by phone or by typing in the company Web address into your Web browser. Don't click on the links in these messages as they make take you to fraudulent, malicious Web sites. Steer clear of fraudulent Web sites used to steal personal information. When visiting a Web site, type the address (URL) directly into the Web browser rather than following a link within an email or instant message. Fraudsters often forge these links to make them look convincing. A shopping, banking or any other Web site where sensitive information should have an "S" after the letters "http" (i.e. https://

www.yourbank.com not http://www.yourbank.com). The "s" stands for secure and should appear when you are in an area requesting you to login or provide other sensitive data. Another sign that you have a secure connection is the small lock icon in the bottom of your web browser (usually the right-hand corner). Internet and online security - 93 Pay attention to privacy policies on Web sites and in software. It is important to understand how an organization might collect and use your personal information before you share it with them. Guard your email address. Spammers and "phishers" sometimes send millions of messages to email addresses that may or may not exist in hopes of finding a potential victim. Responding to these messages or even downloading images ensures you will be added to their lists for more of the same messages in the future. Also be careful when posting your email address online in newsgroups, blogs or online communities. Online offers that look too good to be true usually are The old saying "there's no such thing as a free lunch" still rings true today. Supposedly "free" software such as screen savers or smileys, secret investment tricks sure to make you untold fortunes, and contests that you've surprisingly won without entering are the enticing hooks used by companies to grab your attention. While you may not directly pay for the software or service with money, the free software or service you asked for may have been bundled with advertising software ("adware") that tracks your behavior and displays unwanted advertisements. You may have to divulge personal information or purchase something else in order to claim your supposed content winnings. If an offer looks so good it's hard to believe, ask for someone else's opinion, read the fine print, or even better, simply ignore it. Review bank and credit card statements regularly The impact of identity theft and online crimes can be greatly reduced if you can catch it shortly after your data is stolen or when the first use of your information is attempted. One of the easiest ways to get the tip-off that something has gone wrong is by reviewing the monthly statements provided by your bank and credit card companies for anything out of the ordinary. Additionally, many banks and services use fraud prevention systems that call out unusual purchasing behavior (i.e. if you live in Texas and all of the sudden start buying refrigerators in Budapest). In order to confirm these out of the ordinary purchases, they might call you and ask you to confirm them. Don't take these calls lightly; this is your hint 94 - Internet and online security that something bad may have happened and you should take necessary action. Protect your computer with Windows security tools Windows provides a variety of protection applications. Windows Updates If you have an active Internet connection, Windows can check for important updates for your computer and install them automatically. These updates include security patches and program updates that can improve your computing experience and help protect your computer against new viruses and attacks. How do I know when my computer is at risk?

If the Action Center reports an alert, or if your computer behaves erratically, crashes unexpectedly or if some of your programs do not work correctly, your computer may be infected by malicious software. However, do not blame every computer problem on a virus! If you suspect your computer is infected, the first thing to do is update, if you have not already done so, and run your antivirus and anti-spyware software. PLAYING BLU-RAY OR DVD MOVIES Playing Blu-Ray or DVD movies - 95 If your computer is equipped with a Blu-Ray or DVD drive, you can play movies on your computer or on a high-definition TV via the HDMI port. 1.Insert the disc into the drive. 2.After a few seconds, the movie will start playing. 3.If the movie does not start playing, open your movie playback program and open the disc from the File menu. Important When you launch the DVD player for the first time, the program asks you to enter the region code. DVDs are available for 6 regions Region code Country or region 1 2 3 4 5 6 USA, Canada Europe, Middle East, South Africa, Japan Southeast Asia, Taiwan, South Korea Latin America, Australia, New Zealand Former USSR, parts of Africa, India Peoples Republic of China Note To change the region code, insert a DVD movie of a different region into the DVD drive. Once your DVD drive is set to a region code, it will only play DVDs for that region. You can set the region code a maximum of five times (including the first time), after which the last region code set will remain permanent. Recovering your hard disk does not reset the number of times the region code has been set.

- 1 Regulatory Information and Safety Guide 2 -

2013. All Rights Reserved. Regulatory Information and Safety Guide This revision: September 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of contents - 3 4 Safety and comfort Safety instructions ................................... 4 General ....................................................... 4 Using electrical power................................. 5 Product servicing ........................................ 7 Protecting your hearing ........................... 8 Guidelines for safe battery usage............ 8 Notes for battery packs............................... 9 Disposal instructions................................. 10 Radio frequency interference ................ 10 Medical devices ........................................ 10 Vehicles .................................................... 11 Potentially explosive environments........... 12 Emergency calls .................................... 12 Tips and information for comfortable use 12 Finding your comfort zone ........................ 13 Taking care of your vision......................... 14 Developing good work habits.................... 14 Optical drive information........................ 15 Regulatory information 17 FCC statement....................................... 17 Shielded cables......................................... 17 Peripheral devices .................................... 17 Compliant with Russian regulatory certification............................................. 18 LCD pixel statement .............................. 18 Radio device regulatory notices............. 18 The FCC RF safety requirement............... 19 Declaration of Conformity for EU countries 20 Notices for use in Canada ..................... 22 Low-power license-exempt radio communication devices (RSS-210)........... 22 4 - Safety and comfort SAFETY AND COMFORT Safety instructions Read these instructions carefully. Keep this document for future reference. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. General Do not use this product near water. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. If the product falls, it could be seriously damaged. Slots and openings are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register, or in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided. Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the product. To avoid damage of internal components and to prevent battery leakage, do not place the product on a vibrating surface. Never use it under sporting, exercising, or any vibrating environment which will probably cause unexpected short current or damage rotor devices, HDD, Optical drive, and even exposure risk from lithium battery pack. The bottom surface, areas around ventilation openings and AC adapter may get hot. To avoid injury, ensure they do not come in contact with your skin or body. Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Using electrical power Safety and comfort - 5 This product should be operated from the type of power indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available, consult your dealer or local power company. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where people will walk on the cord. If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere rating of the equipment plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total rating of all products plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the fuse rating. Do not overload a power outlet, strip or receptacle by plugging in too many devices. The overall system load must not exceed 80% of the branch circuit rating. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed 80% of the power strip's input rating. This product's AC adapter is equipped with a three-wire grounded plug. The plug only fits in a grounded power outlet. Make sure the power outlet is properly grounded before inserting the AC adapter plug. Do not insert the plug into a non-grounded power outlet. Contact your electrician for details. Warning The grounding pin is a safety feature. Using a power outlet that is not properly grounded may result in electric shock and/or injury. Note The grounding pin also provides good protection from unexpected noise produced by other nearby electrical devices that may interfere with the performance of this product. The system can be powered using a wide range of voltages; 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 V AC. The power cord included with the system meets the requirements for use in the country/region where the system was purchased. Power cords for use in other countries/

regions must meet the requirements for that country/region. For more information on power cord requirements, contact an authorized reseller or service provider. 6 - Safety and comfort Accessing the power cord Be sure that the power outlet you plug the power cord into is easily accessible and located as close to the equipment operator as possible. When you need to disconnect power to the equipment, be sure to unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet. Turning the product off before cleaning Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Disconnecting the power source Observe the following guidelines when connecting and disconnecting power to the power supply unit:

Install the power supply unit before connecting the power cord to the AC power outlet. Unplug the power cord before removing the power supply unit from the computer. If the system has multiple sources of power, disconnect power from the system by unplugging all power cords from the power supplies. ENERGY STAR Acer's ENERGY STAR qualified products save your money by reducing energy cost and protecting the environment without sacrificing features or performance. Acer is proud to offer our customers products with the ENERGY STAR mark. What is ENERGY STAR?

Products that are ENERGY STAR qualified use less energy and prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency guidelines set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Acer is committed to offering products and services worldwide that help customers save money, conserve energy and improve the quality of our environment. The more energy we can save through higher energy efficiency, the more we reduce greenhouse gases and the risks to www.energystar.gov or www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Acer ENERGY STAR qualified products:

change. More information climate refers of Safety and comfort - 7 produce less heat and reduce cooling loads in warmer climates. automatically go into "display Sleep" and "computer Sleep" mode after 10 and 30 minutes of inactivity, respectively. wake from "Sleep" mode if the keyboard is pressed or mouse is moved. save more than 80% energy when in "Sleep" mode. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Product servicing Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points or other risks. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel when:

The power cord or plug is damaged, cut or frayed. Liquid was spilled into the product. The product was exposed to rain or water. The product has been dropped or the case has been damaged. The product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. The product does not operate normally after following the operating instructions. Important Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, since improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal condition. Bundled dummy cards Your computer may have been shipped with plastic dummies installed in the card slots. Dummies protect unused slots from dust, metal objects or other particles. Save the dummies for use when no cards are in the slots. 8 - Safety and comfort Protecting your hearing Warning Permanent hearing loss may occur if earphones or headphones are used at high volume for prolonged periods of time. To protect your hearing, follow these instructions. Increase the volume gradually until you can hear clearly and comfortably. Do not increase the volume level after your ears have adjusted. Do not listen to music at high volumes for extended periods. Do not increase the volume to block out noisy surroundings. Decrease the volume if you can't hear people speaking near you. Guidelines for safe battery usage Warning Batteries may explode if not handled properly. Do not disassemble or dispose of them in fire. Keep them away from children. Follow local regulations when disposing of used batteries. This computer uses a Lithium-ion or Lithium-polymer battery. Do not use it in a humid, wet or corrosive environment. Do not put, store or leave your product in or near a heat source, in a high temperature location, in strong direct sunlight, in a microwave oven or in a pressurized container, and do not expose it to temperatures over 60 C (140 F). Failure to follow these guidelines may cause the battery to leak acid, become hot, explode or ignite and cause injury and/or damage. Do not pierce, open or disassemble the battery. If the battery leaks and you come into contact with the leaked fluids, rinse thoroughly with water and seek medical attention immediately. For safety reasons, and to prolong the lifetime of the battery, charging will not occur at temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 40 C

(104 F). The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be Safety and comfort - 9 charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the operation time becomes noticeably shorter than normal, buy a new battery (for models with battery packs) or refer to qualified service personnel (for models with an integrated battery). Use only the approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with the approved chargers designated for this device. The capacity and lifetime of the battery will be reduced if the battery is left in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter. Always try to keep the battery between 15C and 25C (59F and 77F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is especially limited in temperatures well below freezing. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Notes for battery packs Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery.

(These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Note Please refer to www.acer.com for battery shipping documents. The computer uses lithium batteries. Replace the battery with the same type as that which came bundled with your product. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. 10 - Safety and comfort Disposal instructions Do not throw this electronic device into the trash when discarding. To minimize pollution and ensure utmost protection of the global environment, please recycle. For more from Electrical and Electronics Equipment (WEEE) regulations, visit www.acer-group.com/public/Sustainability. information on the Waste Radio frequency interference Warning For safety reasons, turn off all wireless or radio transmitting devices when using your laptop when instructed to do so. Transmitting devices may include, but are not limited to: wireless LAN (WLAN), Bluetooth and 3G. Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used normally, and it and its antenna are positioned at least 1.5 centimeters (5/8 inch) away from your body. It should not contain metal and you should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. To successfully transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure that the above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device, and persons with hearing aids should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected Safety and comfort - 11 medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF transmissions. Pacemakers. Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) be maintained between wireless devices and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should do the following:

Always keep the device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from research by and the pacemaker Not carry the device near your pacemaker when the device is switched on. If you suspect interference, switch off your device, and move it. Hearing aids. Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic anti-skid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment 12 - Safety and comfort area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed, and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Do not switch the computer on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Emergency calls Important You cannot make emergency calls through this device. To make an emergency call you should dial out through your mobile phone or other telephone call system. Tips and information for comfortable use Computer users may complain of eyestrain and headaches after prolonged use. Users are also at risk of physical injury after long hours of working in front of a computer. Long work periods, bad posture, poor work habits, stress, inadequate working conditions, Safety and comfort - 13 personal health and other factors greatly increase the risk of physical injury. Incorrect computer usage may lead to carpal tunnel syndrome, tendonitis, tenosynovitis or other musculoskeletal disorders. The following symptoms may appear in the hands, wrists, arms, shoulders, neck or back:

Numbness, or a burning or tingling sensation. Aching, soreness or tenderness. Pain, swelling or throbbing. Stiffness or tightness. Coldness or weakness. If you have these symptoms, or any other recurring or persistent discomfort and/or pain related to computer use, consult a physician immediately and inform your company's health and safety department. The following section provides tips for more comfortable computer use. Finding your comfort zone Find your comfort zone by adjusting the viewing angle of the monitor, using a footrest, or raising your sitting height to achieve maximum comfort. Observe the following tips:

Refrain from staying too long in one fixed posture. Avoid slouching forward and/or leaning backward. Stand up and walk around regularly to remove the strain on your leg muscles. Take short rests to relax your neck and shoulders. Avoid tensing your muscles or shrugging your shoulders. Install the external display, keyboard and mouse properly and within comfortable reach. If you view your monitor more than your documents, place the display at the center of your desk to minimize neck strain. 14 - Safety and comfort Taking care of your vision Long viewing hours, wearing incorrect glasses or contact lenses, glare, excessive room lighting, poorly focused screens, very small typefaces and low-contrast displays could stress your eyes. The following sections provide suggestions on how to reduce eyestrain. Eyes Rest your eyes frequently. Give your eyes regular breaks by looking away from the monitor and focusing on a distant point. Blink frequently to keep your eyes from drying out. Display Keep your display clean. Keep your head at a higher level than the top edge of the display so your eyes point downward when looking at the middle of the display. Adjust the display brightness and/or contrast to a comfortable level for enhanced text readability and graphics clarity. Eliminate glare and reflections by:

placing your display in such a way that the side faces the window or any light source, minimizing room light by using drapes, shades or blinds, using a task light, changing the display's viewing angle, using a glare-reduction filter, using a display visor, such as a piece of cardboard extended from the display's top front edge. Avoid adjusting your display to an awkward viewing angle. Avoid looking at bright light sources for extended periods of time. Developing good work habits The following work habits make computer use more relaxing and productive:

Take short breaks regularly and often. Perform some stretching exercises. Breathe fresh air as often as possible. Safety and comfort - 15 Exercise regularly and maintain a healthy body.. Important We do not recommend using the computer on a couch or bed. If this is unavoidable, work for only short periods, take breaks regularly, and do some stretching exercises. Optical drive information Note Information in this section may not apply to your computer. CAUTION: This appliance contains a laser system and is classified as a "CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT." In case of any trouble with this device, please contact your nearest authorized service center. To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the enclosure. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CAUTION: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1 PRODUIT LASERATTENTION: RADIATION DU FAISCEAU LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS DOUVERTURE. EVITTER TOUTE EXPOSITION AUX RAYONS. LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE LASER KLASSE 1 VORSICHT:

ABDECKUNG GEFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHLL AUSSETZEN PRODUCTO LSER DE LA CLASE I ADVERTENCIA: RADIACIN LSER INVISIBLE AL SER ABIERTO. EVITE EXPONERSE A LOS RAYOS. ADVARSEL: LASERSTRLING VEDBNING SE STRLEN. VARO! LAVATTAESSA OLET ALTTINA LASERSTEILYLLE. VARNING: LASERSTRLNING NR DENNA DEL R PPNAD L TUIJOTA STEESEENSTIRRA EJ IN I STRLEN VARNING:

PPNADSTIRRA EJ IN I STRLEN LASERSTRLNING NAR DENNA DEL LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN UNSICHTBARE IKKE IND R I 16 - Safety and comfort ADVARSEL: LASERSTRLING NAR DEKSEL PNESSTIRR IKKE INN I STRLEN Warning For safety reasons, do not use non-compliant parts when adding or changing components. Consult your reseller for purchase options. REGULATORY INFORMATION Regulatory information - 17 FCC statement This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the device and receiver. Connect the device into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. Shielded cables All connections to other computing devices must be made using shielded cables to maintain compliance with FCC regulations. Peripheral devices Only peripherals (input/output devices, terminals, printers, etc.) certified to comply with the Class B limits may be attached to this 18 - Regulatory information equipment. Operation with non-certified peripherals is likely to result in interference to radio and TV reception. Note Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority, which is granted by the Federal Communications Commission, to operate this computer. Compliant with Russian regulatory certification LCD pixel statement The LCD unit is produced with high-precision manufacturing techniques. Nevertheless, some pixels may occasionally misfire or appear as black or red dots. This has no effect on the recorded image and does not constitute a malfunction. Radio device regulatory notices Note The regulatory information below applies to models with wireless LAN and /

or Bluetooth only. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors. This product complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. Depending on configurations, this product may or may not contain wireless radio devices (such as wireless LAN and/or Bluetooth modules). Below information is for products with such devices. The FCC RF safety requirement Regulatory information - 19 The radiated output power of the wireless LAN Mini PCI Card and Bluetooth card is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the computer shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized as follows:

1.Users are requested to follow the RF safety instructions on wireless option devices that are included in the user's manual of each RF option device. 2.This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. 3.High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. 20 - Regulatory information 4.An improper installation or unauthorized use may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Also any tampering of the internal antenna will void the FCC certification and your warranty. Declaration of Conformity for EU countries Hereby, Acer, declares that this computer is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Wireless operation channels for different domains N. America Japan Europe ETSI 2.412-2.462 GHz 2.412-2.484 GHz 2.412-2.472 GHz Ch01 through Ch11 Ch01 through Ch14 Ch01 through Ch13 France: Restricted wireless frequency bands Some areas of France have a restricted frequency band. The worst case maximum authorized power indoors is:

10 mW for the entire 2.4 GHz band (2400 MHz to 2483.5 MHz) 100 mW for frequencies between 2446.5 MHz and 2483.5 MHz Note Channels 10 through 13 inclusive operate in the band 2446.6 MHz to 2483.5 MHz. There are few possibilities for outdoor use: On private property or on the private property of public persons, use is subject to a preliminary authorization procedure by the Ministry of Defense, with maximum authorized power of 100 mW in the 2446.5 to 2483.5 MHz band. Use outdoors on public property is not permitted. In the departments listed below, for the entire 2.4 GHz band:

Maximum authorized power indoors is 100 mW Maximum authorized power outdoors is 10 mW Departments in which the use of the 2400 to 2483.5 MHz band is permitted with an EIRP of less than 100 mW indoors and less than 10 mW outdoors:

Regulatory information - 21 01 Ain Orientales 02 Aisne 03 Allier 05 Hautes Alpes 08 Ardennes 09 Ariege 11 Aude 12 Aveyron 16 Charente 24 Dordogne This requirement is likely to change over time, allowing you to use your wireless LAN card in more areas within France. Please check with ART for the latest information

(www.art-telecom.fr). Note Your WLAN Card transmits less than 100 mW, but more than 10 mW. 22 - Regulatory information List of national codes This equipment may be operated in the following countries:

Country Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Notices for use in Canada This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Remarque l'intention des utilisateurs canadiens Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB-

003 du Canada. Low-power license-exempt radio communication devices (RSS-210) Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) The computer employs low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population;

consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's website at www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Regulatory information - 23 This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003, Issue 4, and RSS-210, No 4 (Dec 2000) and No 5 (Nov 2001).

"To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."

Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-

003, No. 4, et CNR-210, No 4 (Dec 2000) et No 5 (Nov 2001). Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afin de fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Important When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The maximum allowed antenna gain for use with this device is 6 dBi in order to comply with the E.I.R.P limit for the 5.25 to 5.35 and 5.725 to 5.85 GHz frequency range in point-to-point operation. SAR tests are conducted using recommended operating positions accepted by the FCC/RSS with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency band without distance attaching away from the body. Non-compliance with the above restrictions may result in violation of FCC RF exposure guidelines.

Introduction: Broadcom BCM94352HMB PCI-E Mini Card User's Guide Before you begin Things you should know BCM94352HMB network Before you begin Obtain the following information from your network administrator (if you are a home user, obtain this information from the person that installed your wireless access point):

l Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks that you want to connect to. l WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks you want to connect to. l For Microsoft Windows networking, your customer name and workgroup name. l For your network account, your user name and password. l Your IP address (if not using a DHCP server) Things you should know When you start your computer, your Broadcom BCM94352HMB PCI-E Mini card detects certain wireless networks that are within range. Before you can connect to these and other wireless networks, you must configure a profile for each network using the information you obtained from your network administrator. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in the IEEE 802.11g standard) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network you are connecting to has enabled WEP, you must also enable WEP in the network profile and set the WEP key to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, you cannot connect to the network. Broadcom BCM94352HMB network The Broadcom BCM94352HMB solution allows you to make a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated below. Back to top Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Back to Contents Page Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Overview Utility Components Overview The Broadcom Wireless Utility enables you to do the following network tasks:

l Manage your wireless networks and create network connection profiles (Wireless Networks tab) l Connect to available networks (utility icon in notification area) l Get information about the network status and signal and noise of your network connection (Link Status tab) l View current and accumulated statistics (Statistics tab) l Find out which broadcasting networks are in range and search for nonbroadcasting networks (Site Monitor tab) l Run tests on the wireless network adapter (Diagnostics tab) l Get date and version information about the utility, and software, hardware, and location details about your wireless network adapter (Information tab) l Manually add or delete trusted servers and enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes (Wireless Networks tab) l Manually import EAP-FAST PACs (Wireless Networks tab) In the utility, you can open Wireless Network Wizard to connect to a basic network or create an ad hoc network, or you can open the Wireless Network Connection Settings tool to connect to an advanced network. To do any of the other tasks, click the tab that is associated with the described task. To start using the utility, right-click the utility icon If the icon is not available, open Broadcom Wireless Utility in Control Panel. in the notification area, and then click Open Utility. NOTE: The utility icon may not appear exactly as shown here. See "Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon."

Utility Components Utility components include the utility icon in the notification area, the six utility tabs, and Wireless Network Connection Settings. Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Utility Icon To do any of the following tasks or operations, right-click the utility icon, and then click the appropriate item. l Open the on-line Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide

(Help Files) l Open About WLAN Card Utility to view links to Broadcom and Broadcom Customer Support websites and to view the version and date of the utility (About) l Hide the utility icon (Hide Tray Icon) l Disable or enable the radio (Disable/Enable Radio) l Connect to any of the networks for which you have created a connection profile and are within range (Connect To) l Open the utility to the Wireless Networks tab (Open Utility) l Open the utility to the Link Status tab to view information about the connection (Status) l Display a log of your wireless network events (Display Log) Wireless Networks Tab The Wireless Networks tab has tools that enable you to do the following:

l Use the utility to manage your wireless networks l Add a network connection profile l Edit or remove a network connection profile l Change the order in which profiles are listed under Preferred network connections l Connect to any listed network without changing its order in the list l Disable or enable the radio (Disable/Enable Radio) l Show or hide the utility icon in the notification area l Choose which type of network to access l Lock or unlock a preferred network connection profile l Save your wireless network connection profiles as a WPN file l Import a WPN file l Manually add or delete trusted servers and enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes l Manually import EAP-FAST PACS On the Add menu, you can use either the wireless network wizard that is available from Broadcom Wireless Utility (see Connecting to a Basic Network or Creating an Ad Hoc Network Using the Wireless Network Wizard") or the utility (see "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility") to add a network connection profile. To use the utility to manage your wireless networks, select the Let this tool manage your wireless networks check box. To add a network connection profile, click the Add arrow, and then click either Use Wizard (basic network) or Use Utility (advanced network). To edit or remove a network connection profile, right-click the network name, and then click either Edit or Remove. To change the order in which profiles are listed under Preferred network connections, click the network name, and then click either the up arrow or down arrow. To connect to any listed network without changing its order in the list, right-click the network name, and then click Connect. Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide To disable the radio, clear the Enable radio check box. To enable the radio, select the Enable radio check box. To hide the utility icon utility icon check box.

, clear the Show utility icon check box. To show the icon, select the Show To choose the type of network to access, click the Options arrow, and then click Advanced. To lock or unlock a preferred network connection profile, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the network name, and then click Lock or Unlock, as appropriate. NOTE: You must have system or administrator rights to be able to lock or unlock a profile. To save your wireless network connection profiles to a WPN file, click the Options arrow, and then click Export (see "Saving Preferred Network Connection Settings to a File" in "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility."

To import a WPN file, click the Options arrow, and then click Import (see "Importing a Preferred Network Connection Profiles File" in "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility."

Click Apply or OK after you change any of the settings for the change to take effect. Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide For networks that use the EAP-FAST authentication method, the Wireless WLAN Card Utility automatically adds trusted servers to the trust list and accepts auto-provisioning and AID (A-ID) group changes by default. The utility also enables you to import a Protected Access Credential (PAC). From the utility, you can also manually add or delete trusted servers, enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes, or import or delete PACS, as described in the following instructions. In general, you should use the default settings. Therefore, check with the network administrator before you make any changes. To manually add a trusted server to the trust list 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. Click Add. 4. Type the A-ID friendly name of the trusted server in the space provided, and then click OK. To delete a trusted server from the trust list Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. In the Trust list (A-ID), click the name of the trusted server you want to delete, and then click Delete. To change the default settings for administering Cisco Compatible Extensions 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. Clear the Disable auto-provision prompt check box to enable manual acceptance or rejection. 4. Clear the Disable A-ID group change prompt check box to enable manual acceptance or 5. Select the Auto-provision PAC only once check box to auto-provision a Protected Access rejection. Credential (PAC) only once. To import or remove an EAP-FAST PAC 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and 3. To import a PAC: in Protected Access Credentials, click Add, and then follow the on-screen then click Manage PACs. instructions. NOTE: The PAC is password protected, so you must know the password to be able to import the PAC.

-or-

To remove a PAC: click anywhere in the row that lists the PAC, and then click Remove. Link Status Network status and signal and noise information about your network connection is displayed on the Link Status tab. NOTES:

l For IEEE 802.11n connections, speed is indicated by an MCS value. l Radio Stream information is provided only for IEEE 802.11n connections. l Click anywhere in the Signal & noise history box to change the type of history being displayed. Successive clicks change the type from both signal and noise, to noise only, to signal only, and back to both signal and noise. Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide The status of your network connection is also indicated by the appearance of the utility icon number and color of the radio waves indicates the strength or weakness of the signal (see Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon for details). The To view the network name (SSID), speed, signal strength rating, connection status, and the client IP address of the network connection, move your mouse pointer over the utility icon. NOTE: On computers running Windows XP, you also can view the SSID, speed, signal strength rating, and connection status by moving your mouse pointer over the Windows Wireless Network Connection icon in the notification area. Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Icon Appearance Indicated Received Signal Strength The signal strength is very good or excellent. The signal strength is weak. See Troubleshooting for suggested action. No signal is being received. See Troubleshooting for probable causes and suggested action. The radio is disabled or switched off. See Troubleshooting for suggested action. Statistics On the Statistics tab under Current, the following current statistics are shown:

l Network name (SSID) l Connection time l Packets sent l Packets received l Sent packets lost l Received packets lost l Total packets lost (%) Under Accumulated, the following accumulated statistics are shown:

l Packets sent l Packets received l Sent packets lost l Received packets lost Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Site Monitor Basic Site Monitor On the Site Monitor tab, the basic Site Monitor displays information about wireless routers/APs and ad hoc networks that are within range. To sort the list, click the column heading that shows the characteristic you want to sort by. For example, to sort by signal strength, click Signal . To view information about a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network. The network information is shown under Selected Network. To view or change the network connection settings for a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, and then click Editif you have not yet created a network connection profile for that particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network and want to do so, click Add . To see the information elements for a listed AP or ad hoc network, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the AP or ad hoc network, and then click Show Information Elements. Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide NOTES:

l Nonbroadcasting networks are labeled (nonbroadcasting) under Network Name. l The network performance may be degraded while Site Monitor is displaying nonbroadcasting APs to which you are not currently connected. l The symbols under AP Band indicate IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, or IEEE 802.11n operation. To see more detailed information about a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, and then click Advanced. Advanced Site Monitor To save the activity log to a file, click the Options arrow, and then click Start Log. Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide You can adjust the time interval between scans by clicking the Options arrow, and then clicking either one of the preset values or clicking Customize to specify a different time interval. NOTE: The network performance may be degraded while Site Monitor is displaying nonbroadcasting networks to which you are not currently connected. To view detailed network information for a single nonbroadcasting network, type the network name in the Look for box, and then click Find. To reset the site monitor to the broadcasting networks, click Clear. Diagnostics On the Diagnostics tab, you can run a number of tests to determine if your wireless network adapter is functioning properly. Select the tests you want to run, and then click Run. For information about an individual test, look under Information before you click Run. To see the test results, look under Information after you click Run. NOTE: The network connection is lost when you run the tests. When the test run is over, your network connection is automatically reestablished. Also, you can view a log of your wireless network events. To do so, click Log. Examples of wireless network events that are logged include:

Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide l Initiation of user session l Connecting to a network l Disconnecting from current network l Authentication mode being used l Driver status l Supplicant status l New wireless device available l Initializing wireless state machine l Wireless utility is managing this adapter l Wireless utility is not managing this adapter If your Broadcom 802.11 Network Adapter fails any of the diagnostics tests, go to http://www.broadcom. com/ for technical support. Using the Broadcom BT Utility: Quick Start Guide Step 1: Installing the Software NOTE: This installation is required before you insert the module into the USB port of your computer. 1. Insert the Bluetooth USB Module installation compact disc (CD) into the CD-ROM or DVD drive of your computer. 2. If the Main Menu screen appears automatically, select Install software and click OK. If the Main Menu screen does not appear automatically, click Start, click Run, type x:\setup.exe (where x is the CD-ROM or DVD drive letter of your computer), and click OK. 3. Click Next, click Finish, and then restart your computer. 4. Right-click the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar notification area (system tray) and click Start Using Bluetooth. Follow the instructions provided by the Initial Bluetooth Configuration Wizard. Step 2: Inserting the Module Make sure that the Bluetooth USB Module is properly inserted inside your computer. If you started at Step 1: Installing the Software The Found New Hardware Wizard detects and installs the device. When the installation is finished, you are ready to begin using the Bluetooth features of this computer. If you skipped Step 1: Installing the Software, you are ready to begin using the Bluetooth features of this computer. NOTE: Before you begin, however, please review the Bluetooth USB Module Users Guide. This document provides important information and instructions that will help you do the things you want to do with your Bluetooth enabled computer. Glossary Authentication A Bluetooth security feature that is used to verify identity; it requires a Bluetooth PIN Code from the remote device. Authorization A Yes-or-No Bluetooth security feature that requires operator intervention to avoid having the connection time out and fail. Bluetooth device Bluetooth enabled hardware such as a computer, printer, fax, mouse, keyboard, cell phone, headset, or PDA. Regulatory Statements for BCM94352HMB Please refer to Broadcom OEM installation guide separation distance o

User Guide Product notice Software terms This guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product

(hardware and software) within 14 days for a refund subject to the refund policy of your place of purchase. For any further information or to request a full refund of the computer, please contact your local point of sale (the seller). Copyright 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: August 2013 First Edition: July 2013 Document Part Number: 726517-002 Safety warning notice WARNING!

To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). ENWW iii iv Safety warning notice ENWW Table of contents 1 Starting right .................................................................................................................... 1 HP Quick Start ......................................................................................................................... 1 Best practices .......................................................................................................................... 1 Fun things to do ....................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources ................................................................................................................... 3 2 Getting to know your computer ........................................................................................ 5 Finding your hardware and software information ......................................................................... 5 Locating hardware .................................................................................................... 5 Locating software ...................................................................................................... 5 Tablet edge components ........................................................................................................... 5 Display ................................................................................................................................... 8 Keyboard dock ...................................................................................................................... 10 Top ....................................................................................................................... 10 TouchPad ............................................................................................................... 11 Lights ..................................................................................................................... 12 Keys ...................................................................................................................... 13 Right side ............................................................................................................... 14 Left side ................................................................................................................. 15 Releasing the tablet from the keyboard dock ............................................................... 16 Locating system information ..................................................................................................... 16 Changing your tablet's settings ................................................................................................ 17 Changing your tablet's view ..................................................................................... 17 Adjusting your tablet's autorotate lock ......................................................... 17 Adjusting your tablet's screen brightness ..................................................... 17 Using touch screen gestures ..................................................................................................... 18 One-finger slide ...................................................................................................... 18 Tapping ................................................................................................................. 19 Scrolling ................................................................................................................ 20 Pinching/stretching ................................................................................................. 20 Rotating (select models only) ..................................................................................... 21 Edge swipes ........................................................................................................... 21 Right-edge swipe ...................................................................................... 21 Left-edge swipe ........................................................................................ 22 Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe ..................................................... 22 Setting touch screen preferences .............................................................................................. 23 ENWW v Using the on-screen keyboard .................................................................................................. 23 3 Connecting to a network ................................................................................................ 25 Connecting to a wireless network ............................................................................................. 25 Using the wireless controls ........................................................................................ 25 Using the wireless button ........................................................................... 25 Using operating system controls ................................................................. 26 Using a WLAN ....................................................................................................... 26 Using an Internet service provider .............................................................. 26 Setting up a WLAN .................................................................................. 27 Configuring a wireless router ..................................................................... 27 Protecting your WLAN .............................................................................. 27 Connecting to a WLAN ............................................................................ 28 Using Bluetooth wireless devices ............................................................................... 28 4 Enjoying entertainment features ..................................................................................... 29 Multimedia features ................................................................................................................ 29 Using the webcam ................................................................................................................. 33 Using audio .......................................................................................................................... 33 Connecting speakers .............................................................................................................. 33 Using Beats Audio .................................................................................................................. 33 Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel ......................................................................... 33 Enabling and disabling Beats Audio .......................................................................... 34 Checking the sound ................................................................................................................ 34 Using video ........................................................................................................................... 35 Connecting an HDMI device ..................................................................................... 35 Configuring HDMI audio settings ............................................................... 36 Camera ................................................................................................................. 37 5 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices ............................. 38 Using the TouchPad ................................................................................................................ 38 Using TouchPad gestures ......................................................................................................... 38 Tapping ................................................................................................................. 39 Scrolling ................................................................................................................ 39 Pinching/zooming ................................................................................................... 40 Rotating (select models only) ..................................................................................... 40 Flicking (select models only) ...................................................................................... 41 Edge swipes ........................................................................................................... 41 Right-edge swipe ...................................................................................... 42 Top-edge swipe ....................................................................................... 42 vi ENWW Left-edge swipe ........................................................................................ 43 Using the keyboard and mouse ................................................................................................ 43 Using the keys ........................................................................................................ 43 Using the action keys ................................................................................ 43 Using Microsoft Windows 8 shortcut keys ................................................... 45 Using the hot keys .................................................................................... 46 6 Managing power ............................................................................................................ 47 Initiating Sleep and Hibernation ............................................................................................... 47 Initiating and exiting Sleep ....................................................................................... 47 Enabling and exiting Hibernation (select models only) ................................................. 48 Setting password protection on wakeup .................................................................................... 48 Using the power meter and power settings ................................................................................ 49 Running on battery power ....................................................................................................... 49 Factory-sealed battery .............................................................................................. 49 Finding battery information ....................................................................................... 49 Conserving battery power ........................................................................................ 50 Identifying low battery levels ..................................................................................... 50 Resolving a low battery level .................................................................................... 50 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ...................... 50 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................... 50 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ........ 51 Running on external AC power ................................................................................................ 51 Shutting down (turning off) the computer ................................................................................... 51 7 Managing and sharing information ................................................................................ 53 Using a USB device ................................................................................................................ 53 Connecting a USB device ......................................................................................... 53 Removing a USB device ........................................................................................... 54 Connecting a powered USB device ........................................................................... 54 Inserting and removing a memory card ..................................................................................... 55 8 Maintaining your computer ............................................................................................ 56 Improving performance ........................................................................................................... 56 Using Disk Cleanup ................................................................................................. 56 Updating programs and drivers ............................................................................................... 56 Cleaning your computer .......................................................................................................... 56 Cleaning products ................................................................................................... 56 Cleaning procedures ............................................................................................... 57 Cleaning the display ................................................................................. 57 ENWW vii Cleaning the sides and cover ..................................................................... 57 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse ............................................... 57 Traveling with or shipping your computer .................................................................................. 58 9 Securing your computer and information ........................................................................ 59 Using passwords .................................................................................................................... 59 Setting Windows passwords ..................................................................................... 60 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ....................................................................... 60 Using Internet security software ................................................................................................ 61 Using antivirus software ........................................................................................... 61 Using firewall software ............................................................................................ 61 Installing software updates ...................................................................................................... 61 Installing Windows updates ...................................................................................... 61 Installing HP and third-party software updates ............................................................. 62 Securing your wireless network ................................................................................................ 62 Backing up your software applications and information .............................................................. 62 10 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and System Diagnostics ......................................................... 63 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ..................................................................................................... 63 Updating the BIOS ................................................................................................................. 63 Determining the BIOS version ................................................................................... 63 Downloading a BIOS update .................................................................................... 64 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ................................................................................ 64 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device ............................... 65 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering .......................................................................... 66 Creating recovery media and backups ..................................................................................... 66 Creating HP Recovery media .................................................................................... 67 Restore and recovery .............................................................................................................. 68 Using Windows Refresh for quick and easy recovery ................................................... 69 Remove everything and reinstall Windows ................................................................. 69 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager .................................................................... 70 What you need to know ............................................................................ 70 Using the HP Recovery partition ................................................................. 71 Using HP Recovery media to recover .......................................................... 71 Changing the computer boot order ............................................................. 71 Removing the HP Recovery partition .......................................................................... 72 12 Specifications ............................................................................................................... 73 Input power ........................................................................................................................... 73 viii ENWW Operating environment ........................................................................................................... 73 13 Electrostatic Discharge .................................................................................................. 75 Index ................................................................................................................................. 76 ENWW ix x ENWW 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after setup, fun things to do with your computer, and where to get more HP resources. HP Quick Start HP Quick Start gives you the option to use the familiar Start menu from the Windows desktop. Quick Start functions like the traditional Windows Start menu and enables you to conveniently open files and programs using the Windows desktop. To open HP Quick Start from the Windows desktop, click the HP Quick Start icon on the taskbar. Best practices To get the most out of your smart investment, after you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps:

Take a minute to browse the printed Windows 8 Basics guide to explore the new Windows features. If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 25. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. Go to Getting to know your computer on page 5 and Finding your hardware and software information on page 5 for information. Back up your computer. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 66. Fun things to do You know that you can watch a YouTube video on the computer. But did you know that you can also connect your computer to a television or gaming console? For more information, see Connecting an HDMI device on page 35. You know you can listen to music on the computer. But did you know that you can also stream live radio to the computer and listen to music or talk radio from all over the world? See Using audio on page 33. ENWW HP Quick Start 1 Experience music the way the artist intended, with deep, controlled bass and clear, pure sound. See Using Beats Audio on page 33. Use the TouchPad and the new Windows 8 touch gestures for smooth control of images and pages of text. See Using TouchPad gestures on page 38 and Using touch screen gestures on page 18. 2 Chapter 1 Starting right ENWW More HP resources You have already used Setup Instructions to turn on the computer and locate this guide. To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use the information in this table. Resource Setup Instructions Windows 8 Basics guide Help and Support Contents Overview of computer setup and features Overview of using and navigating with Windows 8 A broad range of how-to information and troubleshooting tips To access Help and Support, from the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/

country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, select My computer, and then select User guides, or go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Worldwide support web page Online chat with an HP technician To get support in your language, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, select My computer, and then select User guides. Email support Support telephone numbers Locate HP service center locations Important regulatory notices ENWW More HP resources 3 Resource Limited Warranty*

Contents Specific warranty information about this computer To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, select My computer, and then select Warranty and services, or go to http://www.hp.com/go/

orderdocuments.

*You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD/DVD provided in the box. In some countries/regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For countries/regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

North America: Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd., Boise, ID 83714, USA Europe, Middle East, Africa: Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9, 20063, Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy Asia Pacific: Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/

contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. 4 Chapter 1 Starting right ENWW 2 Getting to know your computer Finding your hardware and software information Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, and then in the System area, click Device Manager. A list reveals all the devices installed on your computer. Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

1. From the Start screen, right-click using the mouse or Swipe from the top of the TouchPad to reveal all apps. Select the All apps icon. 2. Tablet edge components ENWW Finding your hardware and software information 5 Components Description

(1) Power button When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the tablet. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and NOTE:

Microsoft Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the tablet. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. In the search box, type power, tap Settings, and then tap Power options, or see Managing power on page 47. or To learn more about your power settings, on the Start screen, type p. In the search box, type power, select Settings, and then select Power options, or see Managing power on page 47.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Alignment post connectors (2) Align and attach the tablet to the keyboard dock. Power connector Connects an AC adapter. AC adapter/Battery light White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charged. Blinking white: The battery has reached a low battery level. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. Off: The computer is using DC power. Docking port Connects the tablet to the keyboard dock. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW Components

(6) Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Description To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust WARNING!

the volume before using headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-in (microphone). NOTE: Stand-alone microphones and headphones with separate microphone jacks are not supported.

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10) Micro SD memory card reader Supports micro Secure Digital (SD) memory cards. Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE:

The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Volume button Controls speaker volume on the tablet. To increase speaker volume, press the + edge of the button. To decrease speaker volume, press the edge of the button. Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE:

The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. ENWW Tablet edge components 7 Display Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Internal microphones (2) Record audio, automatically filtering out the noise around you and cancelling echoes. Webcam light On: The webcam is on. HP TrueVision Full HD Webcam Records video, captures still photographs, and provides access to video conferences and online chat by means of streaming video. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type c, and then tap CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. or From the Start screen, type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. Automatically adjusts the display brightness based on the lighting conditions in your environment. Send and receive wireless signals. Produce sound. Ambient light sensor WLAN antenna*

Speakers (2) 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW ENWW Description Component

(7) Windows button Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. NOTE: Pressing the Windows button again returns you to the previous screen.

*The antenna is not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the area immediately around the antenna free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. Display 9 Keyboard dock Top Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3) Alignment posts Release latch Align and attach the tablet to the keyboard dock. Releases the tablet from the keyboard dock. To release the tablet, slide the release latch to the left. Docking connector Connects the tablet to the keyboard dock. 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad zone Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Description Reads your finger gesture to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. Functions like the left button of an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. ENWW Keyboard dock 11 Lights Component

(1) Caps lock light

(2)

(3) Mute light Wireless light Description White: Caps lock is on. Off: Caps lock is off. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. White: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Amber: All wireless devices are off. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) esc key fn key Windows key b key Action keys Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Displays system information when pressed in combination with the esc key, and enables or disables Beats Audio when pressed in combination with the fn key. Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again returns you to the previous screen. Enables or disables Beats Audio when pressed in combination with the fn key. Execute frequently used system functions. NOTE: Action keys do not display or function from the on-screen tablet keyboard. ENWW Keyboard dock 13 Right side Component Description

(1)

(1)

(3) USB 3.0 port Connects an optional USB device. HDMI port NOTE:

USB device on page 53. For details about different types of USB ports, see Using a Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. Power connector Connects an AC adapter.

(4) AC adapter/Battery light White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charged. Blinking white: The battery has reached a low battery level. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. Off: The computer is using battery power. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW Left side Component Description

(1)

(2) USB 2.0 port Connects an optional USB device. NOTE:

Using a USB device on page 53. For details about different types of USB ports, see Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the WARNING!

volume before using headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-

in (microphone). NOTE: Stand-alone microphones and headphones with separate microphone jacks are not supported.

(3) Memory card reader Reads data from and writes data to memory cards such as SD. ENWW Keyboard dock 15 Releasing the tablet from the keyboard dock To release the tablet from the keyboard dock, follow these steps:

1. Slide the release latch on the keyboard dock to the left (1). 2. Lift and remove the tablet (2). Locating system information Important system information is located on the bottom edge of the tablet. You may need the information when travelling internationally or when you contact support:

Serial number Product number Warranty period Regulatory and wireless certification information Using Windows, briefly press the fn+esc key combination to display the System Information screen, which provides the product name and serial number of your computer, as well as information about the memory, processor, BIOS, and keyboard. 16 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW Changing your tablet's settings You can change view and screen brightness. Changing your tablet's view Your tablet's orientation, or view, changes automatically from landscape to portrait view, or from portrait to landscape view. 1. To change the view of your tablet from landscape view to portrait view:

Hold the tablet vertically, and then turn it 90 degrees to the right (in a clockwise direction). 2. To change the view of your tablet from portrait view to landscape view:

Hold the tablet vertically, and then turn it 90 degrees to the left (in a counter-clockwise direction). Adjusting your tablet's autorotate lock To adjust your tablet's autorotate lock when the tablet is undocked:

1. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, and then tap Settings. Tap the Screen icon at the bottom right. Tap the Autorotate Lock icon to lock your current tablet screen in place and to prevent rotation. The icon displays a lock symbol when autorotate lock is active. To turn off the autorotate lock, tap the Autorotate Lock icon again. 2. Adjusting your tablet's screen brightness To adjust the screen brightness:

1. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, and then tap Settings. Tap the Screen icon at the bottom right. A vertical slider displays that controls the screen brightness. 2. From the Windows desktop, you can also tap the Power Meter icon in the notification area NOTE:

at the far right of the taskbar, tap Adjust screen brightness, and then move the slider next to Screen brightness at the bottom of the screen. ENWW Changing your tablet's settings 17 Using touch screen gestures A touch screen computer allows you to control items on the screen directly with your fingers. TIP: On touch screen computers, you can perform the gestures on the screen or on the TouchPad. You can also perform on-screen actions with the keyboard and mouse. One-finger slide The one-finger slide is mostly used to pan or scroll through lists and pages, but you can use it for other interactions, too, such as moving an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. NOTE: When many apps are displayed on the Start screen, you can slide your finger to move the screen left or right. To drag, press and hold an object, and then drag the object to move it. 18 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the tap function. Use one finger to tap an object on the screen to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. NOTE:

about the object. Press and hold your finger on an object to open a help screen that provides information ENWW Using touch screen gestures 19 Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving the pointer up, down, left, or right on a page or image. Place two fingers on the screen and then drag them in an up, down, left, or right motion. Pinching/stretching Pinching and stretching allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the display and then move your fingers apart. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the display and then move your fingers together. 20 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW Rotating (select models only) Rotating allows you to turn items such as photos. Anchor the forefinger of your left hand on the object you want to rotate. Using your right hand, slide your forefinger around in a sweeping motion from 12 oclock to 3 oclock. To reverse the rotation, move your forefinger from 3 oclock to 12 oclock. NOTE: Rotate is intended for specific apps where you can manipulate an object or image. Rotate may not be functional for all apps. Edge swipes With edge swipes you can perform tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe reveals the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Gently swipe your finger inward from the right edge of the display bezel onto the screen to display the charms. ENWW Using touch screen gestures 21 Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe accesses your recently opened apps so that you can switch between them quickly. Gently swipe your finger inward from the left edge of the display bezel to switch between recently-

opened apps. Without lifting your finger, swipe back toward the left edge to display all recently opened apps. Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe The top-edge swipe or bottom-edge swipe allows you to open a list of apps available on your computer. 1. Gently swipe finger from the top edge or the bottom edge of the display bezel onto the screen. 22 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW 2. Tap All apps to view available apps. Setting touch screen preferences Mode Steps 1. 2. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type c, tap Control Panel, tap Hardware and Sound, tap Pen and Touch, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 1. On the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. 2. Select Hardware and Sound, select Pen and Touch, and then follow the on-screen instructions. These preferences are specific to the touch screen and the computer. Using the on-screen keyboard You may want to enter data into a data field. This may be required when you set up a wireless network configuration or a weather reporting location, or when you access user accounts on Internet sites. The computer has an on-screen keyboard that is displayed when you need to enter such information. 1. To display the keyboard, tap in the first data field. Tap the small keyboard icon that is displayed. or Tap the keyboard icon on the right side of the notification area. 2. To enlarge the size of the on-screen keyboard, tap the lower-right corner and drag it to the desired size. ENWW Setting touch screen preferences 23 3. Tap each character, continuing until you have spelled out the name or word that you are entering into the data field. NOTE: Action keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. NOTE: Suggested words may be displayed at the top of the on-screen keyboard. If an appropriate word is displayed, tap it to select it. 4. Tap enter on the keyboard. 24 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close together typically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, see the information and website links provided in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:

Wireless button, wireless switch, or wireless key (referred to in this chapter as the wireless button)

(select models only) Operating system controls Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (white) when you turn on the computer. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is white, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. ENWW Connecting to a wireless network 25 Using operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

Mode Steps 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type network and sharing in the search box, and then tap Settings. Tap Network and Sharing Center. From the Start screen, type network and sharing, and then select Settings. Select Network and Sharing Center. For more information, from the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other devices and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE:

The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of devices and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired devices to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Using an Internet service provider When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. NOTE: Your ISP will give you a user ID and a password to use for Internet access. Record this information and store it in a safe place. 26 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network ENWW Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider A wireless router (2) (purchased separately) A wireless computer (3) NOTE: Some modems have a built-in wireless router. Check with your ISP to determine what type of modem you have. The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired devices can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Configuring a wireless router For help in setting up a WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. It is recommended that you initially connect your new wireless device to the router by using NOTE:

the network cable provided with the router. When the device successfully connects to the Internet, disconnect the cable, and access the Internet through your wireless network. Protecting your WLAN When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. If you are concerned about the security of your device when connected to a hotspot, limit your network activities to email that is not confidential and basic Internet surfing. Wireless radio signals travel outside the network, so other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals. Take the following precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a firewall. A firewall checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. ENWW Connecting to a wireless network 27 Wireless encryption uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. For more information, from the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. From the Windows desktop, tap or click the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Select your WLAN from the list. 3. 4. Click Connect. 5. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, from the Windows desktop, right-

NOTE:

click the network status icon, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center. Click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN NOTE:

implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using Bluetooth wireless devices A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network

(PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Bluetooth software Help. 28 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network ENWW 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the webcam, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, or television, or speakers and headphones. Multimedia features Here are some of the entertainment features on your computer. ENWW Multimedia features 29 Component

(1) Description Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. To reduce the risk of WARNING!

personal injury, adjust the volume before using headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-in

(microphone). NOTE: Stand-alone microphones and headphones with separate microphone jacks are not supported.

(2) Volume button Controls speaker volume. To increase speaker volume, press the + edge of the button. To decrease speaker volume, press the edge of the button. 30 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features ENWW Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Internal microphones (2) Record sound. Webcam light On: The webcam is in use. HP TrueVision Full HD Webcam Ambient light sensor Records video, captures still photographs, allows you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. type c, and then tap CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. or From the Start screen, type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. Automatically adjusts the display brightness based on the lighting conditions in your environment. Speakers (2) Produce sound. ENWW Multimedia features 31 Component

(6)

(7) Description HDMI port Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. USB 3.0 port Connects an optional USB device.

(8) b key

(9) Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in

(microphone) jack For details about different types of NOTE:

USB ports, see Using a USB device on page 53. Enables or disables Beats Audio when pressed in combination with the fn key. Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. Beats Audio is enabled by default. You can also view and control the bass settings through the Windows operating system. To view and control the bass properties, open the Beats Audio Control Panel. To open Beats Audio Control Panel, from the Start screen on the keyboard dock, type c, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. To reduce the risk of personal WARNING!

injury, adjust the volume before using headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-in

(microphone). NOTE: Stand-alone microphones and headphones with separate microphone jacks are not supported.

(10) USB 2.0 port Connects an optional USB device. 32 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features ENWW Using the webcam The computer has an integrated HP TrueVision Full HD Webcam, a powerful social networking tool that allows you to communicate up close with friends and colleagues, whether they are next door or on the other side of the world. With the webcam, you can stream video with your instant messaging software, capture and share video, and take still photos. To start the webcam:

Mode Steps 1. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type c, and then tap CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. 2. From the Start screen, type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. For details about using the webcam, go to Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. Using audio On your computer, you can play music CDs, download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web (including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port (or to the audio-out jack) on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Configuring HDMI audio settings on page 36. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Using Beats Audio Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. You can experience Beats Audio through the computer's internal speakers, through external speakers connected to a USB port, or through Beats Audio headphones connected to the headphone jack. Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel Use Beats Audio Control Panel to view and manually control audio and bass settings. To open Beats Audio Control Panel:

ENWW Using the webcam 33 Mode Steps 1. 2. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type c, tap Control Panel, tap Hardware and Sound, and then tap Beats Audio Control Panel. From the Start screen, type c, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. Enabling and disabling Beats Audio To enable or disable Beats Audio:

Mode Steps 1. 2. 3. 1. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type c, tap Control Panel, tap Hardware and Sound, and then tap Beats Audio Control Panel. Follow the on-screen instructions From the Start screen, type c, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. Checking the sound To check the audio functions on your computer, follow these steps:

Mode Steps 1. 2. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type c, tap Control Panel, tap Hardware and Sound, and then tap Sound. 3. When the Sound window opens, tap the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, tap any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and then tap Test. 1. On the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel from the list of applications. 2. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. 3. When the Sound window opens, select the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and then click Test. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the recording functions on your computer, follow these steps:

34 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features ENWW Mode Steps 1. 2. 3. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type s, and then tap Sound Recorder. Tap Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 4. Open a multimedia program and play the recording. 1. From the Start screen, type s, and then select Sound Recorder. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play the recording. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer:

Mode Steps 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type c, and then tap Control Panel from the list of applications. Tap Hardware and Sound, and then tap Sound. From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel from the list of applications. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Using video Your HP computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer without needing to connect to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the keyboard dock to connect an external monitor, projector, or television. Your computer has a high-definition multimedia interface

(HDMI) port, which allows you to connect a high-definition monitor or television. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Check the device manufacturer's instructions if you have questions. Connecting an HDMI device NOTE:

separately. To connect an HDMI device to your keyboard dock, you need an HDMI cable, sold ENWW Using video 35 To see the computer screen image on a high-definition television or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions. 1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition television or monitor. 3. Press f4 on the computer to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4 on the computer, the display state changes. NOTE: Adjust the screen resolution of the external device, especially if you choose the Extend option. From the Start screen on the keyboard dock, type c, and then select Control Panel from the list of applications. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution for best results. Configuring HDMI audio settings HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI television to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 36 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features ENWW To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers and Headphones. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Camera Your tablet includes an integrated HP TrueVision Full HD Webcam which is an input device that allows you to record video and take photos. ENWW Using video 37 5 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices Your computer allows navigation using touch gestures in addition to the keyboard and mouse. Touch gestures can be used on your computer's TouchPad or on a touch screen. NOTE: An external USB mouse (purchased separately) can be connected to one of the USB ports on the keyboard dock. Review the Windows 8 Basics guide included with your computer. The guide provides information on common tasks using the TouchPad, touch screen, or the keyboard. Action keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard of the tablet. Tablet models have special hot key functions on the keyboard to perform routine tasks. Using the TouchPad The TouchPad allows you to navigate the computer screen by using simple finger movements. You can customize the touch gestures by changing settings, button configurations, click speed, and pointer options. From the Start screen, type c, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. Using TouchPad gestures NOTE:

TouchPad gestures are not supported in all apps. 38 Chapter 5 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices ENWW Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the Tap function on the TouchPad. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. NOTE:

selected item. Press and hold on the TouchPad to open a help screen that provides information about the Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. ENWW Using TouchPad gestures 39 Pinching/zooming Pinching and zooming allow you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers apart. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers together. Rotating (select models only) Rotating allows you to turn items such as photos. Point to an object, then anchor the forefinger of your left hand in the TouchPad zone. Using your right hand, slide your forefinger in a sweeping motion from 12 oclock to 3 oclock. To reverse the rotation, move your forefinger from 3 oclock to 12 oclock. NOTE: Rotate is intended for specific apps where you can manipulate an object or image. It may not be functional for all apps. 40 Chapter 5 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices ENWW Flicking (select models only) Flicking allows you to navigate through screens or quickly scroll through documents. Place three fingers on the TouchPad zone and flick your fingers in a light, quick motion up, down, left or right. Edge swipes Edge swipes allow you to access toolbars on your computer for tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. ENWW Using TouchPad gestures 41 Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe accesses the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Swipe your finger gently from the right edge to display the charms. Top-edge swipe The top-edge swipe allows you to open apps available on the Start screen. IMPORTANT: When an app is active, the top-edge gesture varies depending on the app. Swipe your finger gently from the top edge to display available apps. 42 Chapter 5 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices ENWW Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe accesses your recently opened apps so that you can switch between them quickly. Swipe your finger gently from the left edge of the TouchPad to switch between recently opened apps. Using the keyboard and mouse The keyboard and mouse allow you to type, select items, scroll and perform the same functions as using touch gestures. The keyboard dock allows you to use special action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. NOTE: Action keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard of the tablet. TIP:

The Windows key on the keyboard allows you to quickly return to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. Pressing the Windows key again returns you to the previous screen. NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. Using the keys Your computer has different ways to quickly access information or perform functions with certain key combinations. Using the action keys NOTE: Action keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard of the tablet. ENWW Using the keyboard and mouse 43 An action key on the keyboard dock performs an assigned function. The icon on each of the f1 through f4 and f6 through f12 keys illustrates the assigned function for that key. To use an action key function, press and hold the key. The keyboard dock action key feature is enabled at the factory. You can disable this feature in Setup Utility (BIOS). See Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and System Diagnostics on page 63 for instructions on opening Setup Utility (BIOS), and then follow the instructions at the bottom of the screen. To activate the assigned function after disabling the action key feature on the keyboard dock, you must press the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Icon Key f1 f2 f3 f4 f6 f7 f8 f9 f10 f11 f12 Description Opens Help and Support, which provides tutorials, information about the Windows operating system and your computer, answers to questions, and updates to your computer. Help and Support also provides automated troubleshooting tools and access to support. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. This action key can also alternate images among other devices that are receiving video information from the computer. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Decreases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a BD. Begins, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. 44 Chapter 5 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices ENWW Using Microsoft Windows 8 shortcut keys Microsoft Windows 8 provides shortcuts to perform actions quickly. Press the Windows key in combination with the key to perform the action. NOTE: Action keys do not display or function from the on-screen keyboard of the tablet. For additional information on Windows 8 shortcut keys go to HP Support Assistant. To access HP Support Assistant, on the Start screen, select the HP Support Assistant app. Shortcut key alt

Key Description c d q tab f4 Opens the Start screen. Opens the charms. Opens the Windows desktop. Opens the All Apps screen. Switches between open apps. NOTE: Continue to press this key combination until the app you want opens. Closes an active app. NOTE: Action keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard of the tablet. ENWW Using the keyboard and mouse 45 Using the hot keys A hot key is a combination of the fn key and either the esc key or the b key. To use a hot key:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the combination. Function Hot key Description Display system information. fn+esc Displays information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number. Control the bass settings. fn+b Enables or disables the Beats Audio bass settings. Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. Beats Audio is enabled by default. You can also view and control the bass settings through the Windows operating system. To view and control the bass properties, open the Beats Audio Control Panel. To open Beats Audio Control Panel, from the Start screen on the keyboard dock, type c, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. 46 Chapter 5 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices ENWW 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is only running on battery power and an AC power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Your computer supports an optimal power plan to manage how your computer uses and conserves power so that computer performance can be balanced with power conservation. Initiating Sleep and Hibernation Microsoft Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity when running on battery power or on external power. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 47. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. If you want to initiate Hibernation manually, you can enable Hibernation using Power NOTE:

Options. For more information, see Enabling and exiting Hibernation (select models only) on page 48. To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video CAUTION:

playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Initiating and exiting Sleep With the computer on, you can initiate Sleep in the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Settings, tap the Power icon, and then tap Sleep. or From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen. When the charms list opens, select Settings, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. ENWW Initiating Sleep and Hibernation 47 To exit Sleep:

Press the Windows key. Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, and the tablet is connected to the keyboard dock, open the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap or swipe the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and the computer returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

password before the computer will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows Enabling and exiting Hibernation (select models only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options:

1. From the Start screen, type power, select Settings, and then select Power Options from the list of applications. In the left pane, click Choose what the power button does. 2. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. 5. Click Save changes. In the When I press the power button area, select Hibernate. When the computer exits Hibernation, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. From the Start screen, type power, select Settings, and then select Power Options from the list of applications. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 2. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account NOTE:

password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-

screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. 48 Chapter 6 Managing power ENWW Using the power meter and power settings The power meter is located on the Windows desktop. The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, on the Windows desktop, point over the power meter icon. To use Power Options, click the power meter icon and select an item from the list. From the Start screen, type power, select Settings, and then select Power Options. Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also displays a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the tablet and the tablet is not plugged into external power, the tablet runs on battery power. If the tablet has a charged battery installed and the AC adapter is disconnected from the tablet, the tablet automatically switches to battery power and the display brightness decreases to conserve battery life. The battery in the tablet slowly discharges when the tablet is off and unplugged from external power. When the tablet is attached to the keyboard dock, the system is powered by the keyboard docks battery until the battery reaches a critical level in the keyboard dock. At that time, the system switches to the tablets battery. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the tablet, and other factors. NOTE:

keyboard dock, the system is powered by the keyboard dock's battery. There is a secondary battery in the keyboard dock. When the tablet is attached to the Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in HP Support Assistant. To access battery information, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, and then select Battery and performance. If Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. Finding battery information To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in HP Support Assistant. To access battery information, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, and then select Battery and performance. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery test Information on battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity ENWW Using the power meter and power settings 49 Conserving battery power Tips for conserving battery power and maximizing battery life:

Lower the brightness on the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. Turn off wireless when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

The battery light (select models only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The power meter icon on the Windows desktop shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

power settings on page 49. For additional information about the power meter, see Using the power meter and The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect an AC adapter. Connect the keyboard dock to the tablet. Connect an optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Initiate Hibernation (see Enabling and exiting Hibernation (select models only) on page 48). Save your work and shut down the computer. 50 Chapter 6 Managing power ENWW Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. 2. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Running on external AC power For information on connecting to AC power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to AC external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking/expansion device. To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, WARNING!

a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP specifically for this system. CAUTION:

computers. To prevent damage to your system, do not use AC adapters from other tablets or Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a disc (select models only) When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external AC power:

The battery begins to charge. The display brightness increases. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The display brightness automatically decreases to save battery life. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. ENWW Running on external AC power 51 Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period To shut down the tablet when it is not connected to the keyboard dock:

Press the Windows key and the power button at the same time, and then tap Shut down. Although you can turn off the computer by holding down the power button, the recommended procedure to shut down computer is to use the Windows Shut down command. NOTE:

before shutdown is possible by briefly pressing the power button. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Settings, tap the Power icon, and then tap Shut down. or From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen. 3. When the charms list opens, click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

To shut down the unresponsive tablet:

Press both the Windows key and the power button at the same time. To shut down the unresponsive tablet when it is connected to the keyboard dock:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, click the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. 52 Chapter 6 Managing power ENWW 7 Managing and sharing information Drives are digital storage devices that help you store, manage, share, and access information. Your computer has a solid state drive that stores your computer's software, operating system, and also provides storage for all of your personal files. For added capacity or functionality, connect an external drive (purchased separately), such as an optical drive or hard drive, or insert a memory card directly from your phone or camera. A USB flash drive, connected to the Universal Serial Bus (USB) port on your computer, also allows quick data transfer. Some devices use the computer's power to run; others have their own power source. Some devices come with software that must be installed. For information about connecting external wireless devices, see Connecting to a network NOTE:

on page 25. NOTE:

use, see the manufacturer's instructions. For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to Using a USB device Most computers have more than one USB port, because this versatile interface allows you to connect numerous kinds of external devicessuch as a USB keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner, or USB hubto your computer. NOTE: Some USB devices may not be supported when the computer is running on AC or battery power if they do not have their own AC adapters. More than one USB device may not be supported simultaneously when the computer is running on AC or battery power. Type USB 2.0 USB 3.0 Description Transfers data at 60 MB/s. Transfers data at 640 MB/s. USB 3.0 ports, also known as SuperSpeed ports, are also compatible with USB 1.0 and 2.0 devices. Connecting a USB device CAUTION:

device. To reduce the risk of damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect the ENWW Using a USB device 53 Connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. NOTE:

section. The USB port on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this A sound indicates that the device has been detected. NOTE:

icon appears in the notification area, letting you know that the device is recognized by the computer. The first time you connect a USB device, a message displays on the Windows desktop and an Removing a USB device To reduce the risk of damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the CAUTION:

USB device. CAUTION:

procedure to safely remove the USB device. To reduce the risk of loss of information or an unresponsive system, use the following 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the device. 2. From the Windows desktop, tap or click the hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. A message, Safely remove hardware and eject media is revealed. Follow the on-

screen instructions. Connecting a powered USB device CAUTION:

sure that the device is turned off and its AC power cord is unplugged. To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered device, be 1. Connect the device to the computer. 2. 3. Turn on the device. Plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. To disconnect an unpowered external device, stop the device, and then disconnect it from the computer. To disconnect a powered external device, turn off the device, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. 54 Chapter 7 Managing and sharing information ENWW Inserting and removing a memory card To insert a memory card:

CAUTION:

a memory card. To reduce the risk of damage to the memory card connectors, use minimal force to insert 1. Hold the card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. 2. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. A sound indicates that the device has been detected. To remove a memory card:

CAUTION:

to safely remove the memory card. To reduce the risk of loss of data or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure 1. 2. 3. Save your information and close all programs associated with the memory card. From the Windows desktop, tap or click the remove hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Then, follow the on-screen instructions. Press in on the card (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). NOTE:

If the card is not ejected, pull the card out of the slot. ENWW Inserting and removing a memory card 55 8 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter provides information about improving the performance of your computer by running tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides information about updating your programs and drivers, instructions for cleaning your computer, and tips for traveling with your computer. Improving performance Everyone wants a fast computer and by performing regular maintenance tasks, using tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup, you can drastically improve the performance of your computer. Also, as your computer gets older, you might consider installing larger drives and adding more memory. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. From the Start screen, type disk, select Settings, and then select Free up disk space by deleting unnecessary files. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis to the latest versions. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. Technology is always changing, and updating programs and drivers allows your computer to run the latest technology available. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Cleaning your computer Cleaning products Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (For example:

disposable wipes. These wipes come in a variety of brand names.) Alcohol-free glass cleaning fluid Water with mild soap solution 56 Chapter 8 Maintaining your computer ENWW Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, which can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING!

computer while it is turned on:

To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your Turn off the computer. Disconnect external power. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION:

To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that the display is dry before closing the display. Cleaning the sides and cover To clean the sides and cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a WARNING!

vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION:

keys. To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the To clean the TouchPad, keyboard. or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. ENWW Cleaning your computer 57 Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, here are some tips to keep in mind to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Attach the tablet to the keyboard dock to protect the tablet screen. Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards, from the computer. Turn off, and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device installed, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply onboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING!

attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not 58 Chapter 8 Maintaining your computer ENWW 9 Securing your computer and information Tablet security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the non-Windows Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. IMPORTANT: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Tablet risk Unauthorized use of the computer Computer viruses Unauthorized access to data Security feature Power-on password Antivirus software Firewall software Unauthorized access to Setup Utility (BIOS) settings and other system identification information Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the computer Software updates Unauthorized access to a Windows user account User password Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in the HP Setup Utility (BIOS) that is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every three months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. ENWW Using passwords 59 For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Setting Windows passwords Password User password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. You may also set up your computer to require the user password to exit Sleep. See Setting password protection on wakeup on page 48 for more information. Administrator password Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE:

(BIOS) contents. This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility

(BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). NOTE:

the power-on password. The administrator password can be used in place of NOTE: Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. If you enter the power-on password at the first NOTE:

password check before the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed, you must enter the administrator password to access Setup Utility (BIOS). Power-on password Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. NOTE:

the power-on password. The administrator password can be used in place of NOTE: A power-on password is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. 60 Chapter 9 Securing your computer and information ENWW Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use an antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Installing software updates HP, Microsoft Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. For more information, see Updating programs and drivers on page 56. Installing Windows updates Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the computer left the factory. Microsoft sends out alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. ENWW Using Internet security software 61 To be sure that all available updates are installed on the computer, observe these guidelines:

Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your computer. From the Start screen, type w, select Settings, and then select Windows Update. Run Windows Update monthly thereafter. Obtain updates to Windows and other Microsoft programs, as they are released, from the Microsoft website and through the updates link in Help and Support. Installing HP and third-party software updates HP recommends that you regularly update the software and drivers that were originally installed on your computer. To download the latest versions, go to http://www.hp.com/support. At this location, you can also register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. If you have installed third-party software after you purchased your computer, regularly update the software. Software companies provide software updates to their products to correct security problems and improve functionality of the software. Securing your wireless network When you set up your wireless network, always enable security features. For more information, see Protecting your WLAN on page 27. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. For more information, see Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 66. 62 Chapter 9 Securing your computer and information ENWW 10 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and System Diagnostics Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility

(BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Information about how to navigate in Setup Utility (BIOS) is located at the bottom of the screen. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 63. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be displayed by pressing fn

+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Setup Utility (BIOS). 1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Main. 3. To exit Setup Utility (BIOS) without saving your changes, use the arrow keys to select Exit, select Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. 4. Click Yes. ENWW Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) 63 Downloading a BIOS update To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download CAUTION:

and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. 2. Click Updates and tune-ups, and then click Check for HP updates now. 3. 4. At the download area, follow these steps:

Follow the on-screen instructions. a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before From the Start screen, type e, and then select File Explorer. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs 64 Chapter 10 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and System Diagnostics ENWW outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tools in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE:

Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 65. To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see b. Hard drive c. BIOS 2. Click the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device NOTE:

The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) download instructions are provided in English only. 1. Go to http://www.hp.com. 2. Click Support & Drivers, and then click the Drivers & Software tab. 3. 4. 5. Select your computer model, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, click HP UEFI Support Environment. Enter the product name in the text box, and then click Search. or Click Download, and then select Run. ENWW Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 65 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Your computer includes tools provided by HP and Windows to help you safeguard your information and retrieve it if you ever need to. These tools will help you return your computer to a proper working state or even back to the original factory state, all with simple steps. This chapter provides information about the following processes:

Creating recovery media and backups Restoring and recovering your system NOTE:

This guide describes an overview of backing up, restoring and recovering options. For more details about the tools provided, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. Creating recovery media and backups Recovery after a system failure is only as good as your most recent backup. 1. After you successfully set up the computer, create HP Recovery media. This step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. HP Recovery media you create will provide the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system and the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image RecoveryReinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. See Creating HP Recovery media on page 67. 2. As you add hardware and software programs, create system restore points. A system restore point is a snapshot of certain hard drive contents saved by Windows System Restore at a specific time. A system restore point contains information that Windows uses, such as registry settings. Windows creates a system restore point for you automatically during a Windows update and during other system maintenance (such as a software update, security scanning, or system diagnostics). You can also manually create a system restore point at any time. For more information and steps for creating specific system restore points, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. 3. As you add photos, video, music, and other personal files, create a backup of your personal information. Windows File History can be set to regularly and automatically back up files from 66 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ENWW libraries, desktop, contacts, and favorites. If files are accidentally deleted from the hard drive and they can no longer be restored from the Recycle Bin, or if files become corrupted, you can restore the files that you backed up using File History. Restoring files is also useful if you ever choose to reset the computer by reinstalling Windows or choose to recover using HP Recovery Manager. NOTE:

File History is not enabled by default, so you must turn it on. For more information and steps for enabling Windows File History, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. Creating HP Recovery media HP Recovery Manager is a software program that offers a way to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the original operating system and the software programs installed at the factory, and then configures the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore the factory image if you replace a hard drive. Only one set of HP Recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the blank USB flash drive or the number of blank DVD discs that will be required. To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE (rewritable Blu-

ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or instead you can use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, or you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from the HP website. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take up to an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs. HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue, and the remaining discs will be burned. ENWW Creating recovery media and backups 67 To create HP Recovery media:

1. Connect the tablet to the keyboard dock. 2. 3. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Recovery Media Creation, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 70. Restore and recovery There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation and level of expertise:

If you need to restore your personal files and data, you can use Windows File History to restore your information from the backups you created. For more information and steps for using File History, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application or driver. From the Start screen, type recovery, select HP Recovery Manager, select Drivers and Applications Reinstall, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you want to restore the system to a previous state without losing any personal information, Windows System Restore is an option. System Restore allows you to restore without the requirements of Windows Refresh or a reinstallation. Windows creates system restore points automatically during a Windows update and other system maintenance events. Even if you did not manually create a restore point, you can choose to restore to an automatically created restore point. For more information and steps for using Windows System Restore, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. If you want a quick and easy way to recover the system without losing your personal information, settings, or apps that came preinstalled on your computer or were purchased from the Windows Store, consider using Windows Refresh. This option does not require backing up data to another drive. See Using Windows Refresh for quick and easy recovery on page 69. If you want to reset your computer to its original state, Windows provides an easy way to remove all personal data, apps, and settings, and reinstall Windows. For more information, see Remove everything and reinstall Windows on page 69. If you want to reset your computer using a minimized image, you can choose the HP Minimized Image Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or HP Recovery media. Minimized Image Recovery installs only drivers and hardware-enabling applications. Other applications included in the image continue to be available for installation through the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option in HP Recovery Manager. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 70. If you want to recover the computer's original factory partitioning and content, you can choose the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition or the HP Recovery media that you have created. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 70. 68 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ENWW If you have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media to restore the factory image to the replacement drive. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 70. If you wish to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option. For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition on page 72. Using Windows Refresh for quick and easy recovery When your computer is not working properly and you need to regain system stability, the Windows Refresh option allows you to start fresh and keep what is important to you. IMPORTANT: Refresh removes any traditional applications that were not originally installed on the system at the factory. Any Windows 8 apps that came preinstalled on your computer or were purchased from the Windows Store will be saved. NOTE: During Refresh, a list of removed traditional applications will be saved so that you have a quick way to see what you might need to reinstall. See Help and Support for instructions on reinstalling traditional applications. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. NOTE: You may be prompted for your permission or password when using Refresh. See Help and Support for more information. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support. To start Refresh:

1. Connect the tablet to the keyboard dock. 2. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. 3. Click Settings. 4. Click Change PC settings in the bottom-right corner of the screen, and then select General from the PC settings screen. 5. Scroll the right-side choices down to display Refresh your PC without affecting your files. 6. Under Refresh your PC without affecting your files, select Get started, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Remove everything and reinstall Windows Sometimes you want to perform detailed reformatting of your computer, or you want to remove personal information before you give away or recycle your computer. The process described in this section provides a speedy, simple way to return the computer to its original state. This option removes all personal data, apps, and settings from your computer, and reinstalls Windows. IMPORTANT:

back up any personal information you wish to retain. This option does not provide backups of your information. Before using this option, You can initiate this option by using the f11 key or from the Start screen. ENWW Restore and recovery 69 To use the f11 key:

1. Connect the tablet to the keyboard dock. 2. Press f11 while the computer boots. or Press and hold f11 as you press the power button. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Reset your PC, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 3. 4. To use the Start screen:

1. Connect the tablet to the keyboard dock. 2. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. 3. Click Settings. 4. Click Change PC settings in the bottom-right corner of the screen, and then select General from the PC settings screen. Scroll the right-side choices down to display Remove everything and reinstall Windows. 5. 6. Under Remove everything and reinstall Windows, select Get started, and follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media you created or by using the HP Recovery partition. You can choose from one of the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image RecoveryReinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. The HP Recovery partition allows Minimized Image Recovery and System Recovery. What you need to know HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. 70 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ENWW HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 67. To use the Factory Reset option, you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 67. If the HP Recovery media do not work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from the HP website. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data you wish to retain. Using the HP Recovery partition The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows you to perform a minimized image recovery without the need for recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can only be used if the hard drive is still working. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

1. Connect the tablet to the keyboard dock. 2. Press f11 while the computer boots. or Press and hold f11 as you press the power button. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select HP Recovery Manager, and follow the on-screen instructions. 3. 4. Using HP Recovery media to recover You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly. 1. 2. Insert the first HP Recovery disc you created into the optical drive on your computer or into an optional external optical drive, and then restart the computer. If possible, back up all personal files. or Insert the HP Recovery USB flash drive you created into a USB port on your computer, and then restart the computer. NOTE:

computer boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 71. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Changing the computer boot order If computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection for an optical drive or a USB flash drive. ENWW Restore and recovery 71 Insert the HP Recovery media you created. Restart the computer. To change the boot order:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press and hold esc while the computer is restarting, and then press f9 for boot options. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive you want to boot from. Follow the on-screen instructions. Removing the HP Recovery partition HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you can no longer use the Windows Refresh option, the Windows option to remove everything and reinstall Windows, or the HP Recovery Manager option. So before you remove the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media on page 67. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 72 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ENWW 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A - 45 W DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE:

exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE:

This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

ENWW Input power 73 Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft 74 Chapter 12 Specifications ENWW 13 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first make sure that it is properly grounded, and then remove the cover. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface of the component. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. If you need more information about static electricity or assistance with component removal or installation, contact support. ENWW 75 Index A AC adapter light 6, 14 action keys decrease screen brightness 44 Help and Support 44 identifying 13 increase screen brightness 44 next track or section 44 play, pause, resume 44 previous track or section 44 switch screen image 44 volume down 44 volume mute 44 volume up 44 alignment post connectors, identifying 6 alignment posts, identifying 10 ambient light sensor, identifying 8, 31 BIOS determining version 63 downloading an update 64 updating 63 Bluetooth device 25, 28 boot order changing HP Recovery Manager 71 bottom-edge swipe Touch screen 22 brightness adjusting 17 buttons left TouchPad 11 power 6 right TouchPad 11 volume 7, 30 Windows 9 antivirus software, using 61 audio functions, checking 34 audio-out (headphone) jacks 7, C cables USB 54 15, 30, 32 autorotate lock adjusting 17 B backing up personal files 67 backing up software and information 62 backups 66 bass settings hot key 46 battery discharging 50 low battery levels 50 battery information, finding 49 battery light 6, 14 battery power 49 Beats Audio Control Panel 32, 33 enabling and disabling 34 hot key 13, 32, 46 using 33 best practices 1 caps lock light, identifying 12 caring for your computer 56 checking audio functions 34 cleaning your computer 56 components display 8 left-side 15 right-side 14 top 10 computer reset 69 configuring audio for HDMI 36 connecting to a WLAN 28 connector alignment post 6 power 6, 14 corporate WLAN connection 28 critical battery level 50 D deleted files, restoring 68 Disk Cleanup software 56 docking connector, identifying 10 docking port, identifying 6 E edge swipe gestures 21 bottom-edge swipe 22 left-edge swipe 22, 43 right-edge swipe 21, 42 top-edge swipe 22, 42 electrostatic discharge 75 esc key, identifying 13 external AC power, using 51 external devices 54 F firewall software 61 flicking TouchPad gesture 41 fn key, identifying 13, 46 fun things to do 1 H HDMI configuring audio 36 HDMI port connecting 35 identifying 14, 32 Hibernation exiting 48 initiated during critical battery level 50 initiating 48 high-definition devices, connecting 35 hot keys bass settings 46 Beats Audio 13 description 46 display system information 46 using 46 HP and third-party software updates, installing 62 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) using 64 HP Quick Start 1 HP Recovery Manager 70 correcting boot problems 71 starting 71 76 Index ENWW HP TrueVision Full HD Webcam 15 micro SD memory card reader, computer 68, 69 HP Recovery media creating 67 recovery 71 HP Recovery partition 71 recovery 71 removing 72 identifying 8, 31 using 33 hubs 53 I input power 73 installing critical updates 61 internal microphones, identifying Internet connection setup 27 Internet security software, using 8, 31 61 J jacks 30, 32 K keyboard dock audio-out (headphone) 7, 15, identifying 10 releasing the tablet 16 keyboard hot keys, identifying 46 keys action 13 esc 13 fn 13 Windows 13 L labels serial number 16 left-edge swipe Touch screen 22 TouchPad 43 lights AC adapter 6, 14 battery 6, 14 caps lock 12 mute 12 wireless 12 low battery level 50 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 56 memory card inserting 55 memory card reader, identifying identifying 7 minimized image creating 70 recovery 71 mouse, external setting preferences 38 mute light, identifying 12 O operating environment 73 optional external devices, using 54 original system recovery 70 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 60 Windows 60 pinching Touch screen 20 TouchPad 40 ports HDMI 14, 32, 35 USB 14, 15, 32 power battery 49 power button, identifying 6 power connector, identifying 6, 14 product name and number, computer 16 public WLAN connection 28 R recovery 68, 69 discs 67, 71 HP Recovery Manager 70 media 71 starting 71 supported discs 67 system 70 USB flash drive 71 using HP Recovery media 68 recovery media creating 67 creating using HP Recovery Manager 68 recovery partition 71 removing 72 recycle refresh 69 computer 68 regulatory information 16 release latch, identifying 10 remove everything and reinstall Windows 69 reset computer 68, 69 steps 69 restore, Windows File History 68 right-edge swipe rotating Touch screen 21 TouchPad 42 Touch screen 21 TouchPad 40 S scrolling Touch screen 20 TouchPad 39 security, wireless 27 serial number 16 serial number, computer 16 setting password protection on wakeup 48 settings autorotate lock 17 brightness 17 changing 17 landscape view 17 portrait view 17 tablet orientation 17 setup of WLAN 27 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 60 shipping the computer 58 shutdown 52 Sleep exiting 47 initiating 47 slots memory card reader 15 ENWW Index 77 software Disk Cleanup 56 software updates, installing 61 speakers connecting 33 identifying 8, 31 stretching Touch screen 20 supported discs, recovery 67 system information hot key 46 locating 16 system recovery 70, 71 system restore point creating 66 restoring 68 T tapping Touch screen 19 TouchPad 39 top-edge swipe Touch screen 22 TouchPad 42 Touch screen gestures 21 edge swipe gestures 21, 22 one-finger slide 18 pinching 20 rotating 21 scrolling 20 stretching 20 tapping 19 using 18 edge swipe gestures 41, 42, TouchPad buttons 11 identifying 11 TouchPad gestures 43 flicking 41 pinching 40 rotating 40 scrolling 39 tapping 39 using 38 zooming 40 TouchPad zone, identifying 11 traveling with the computer 58 turning off the computer 52 public WLAN connection 28 securing 62 security 27 using 26 WLAN antenna, identifying 8 WLAN device 26 Z zooming TouchPad 40 U unresponsive system 52 USB cable, connecting 54 USB devices connecting 53 description 53 removing 54 USB hubs 53 USB ports, identifying 14, 15, 32 using external AC power 51 using passwords 59 V vent, identifying 7 video 35 volume button, identifying 7, 30 W warranty period 16 Webcam identifying 8, 31 webcam using 33 webcam light, identifying 8, 31 Windows backup 67 File History 67, 68 Refresh 68, 69 reinstall 68, 69 remove everything and reinstall option 69 reset 69 restoring files 68 system restore point 66, 68 Windows button, identifying 9 Windows key, identifying 13 Windows passwords 60 Windows updates, installing 61 wireless certification information 16 wireless controls operating system 25 wireless light 12 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 28 corporate WLAN connection 28 equipment needed 27 functional range 28 78 Index ENWW

OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11a/b/g/n/11ac WLAN + Bluetooth PCI-E Mini card, FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1068; IC: 4324A-BRCM1068 BCM94352HMB Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:

Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically A. identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. B. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of the same type, with same or lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to C. Broadcoms reference designs, new antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with D. applicable regulations in all respects. E. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:

A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the Page 1 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11a/b/g/n/11ac WLAN + Bluetooth PCI-E Mini card, BCM94352HMB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1068; IC: 4324A-BRCM1068 user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:

1. Antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop computer to provide at least 20cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. 2. Transmitting antenna(s) can only be installed at the display section of computer. When this device is installed other than notebook computers, at least 20 cm separation distance shall be maintained between the transmitting antenna(s) to the body of user or nearby person. 3. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. 4. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 5. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1068 and/or IC: 4324A-BRCM1068 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 6. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter Page 2 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11a/b/g/n/11ac WLAN + Bluetooth PCI-E Mini card, BCM94352HMB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1068; IC: 4324A-BRCM1068 module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 7. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. French:

Cet appareil est conforme avec Industrie Canada exempts de licence standard RSS (s). Lutilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its Page 3 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11a/b/g/n/11ac WLAN + Bluetooth PCI-E Mini card, BCM94352HMB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1068; IC: 4324A-BRCM1068 gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. French:

Sous la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, ce transmetteur radio ne peut fonctionner en utilisant une antenne d'un type et un maximum (ou moins) gain approuves pour l'metteur par Industrie Canada. Pour rduire le risque d'interfrence aux autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent tre choisis de manire que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (PIRE) ne dpasse pas ce qui est ncessaire pour une communication russie. This radio transmitter, IC ID: 4324A-BRCM1068, has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the onboard antenna or a detachable WLAN antenna with a maximum gain of 3.9dB/2.4GHz and 5.8dBi/5GHz. Any other detachable antennas, with a different type or having a gain greater than 3.9dB/2.4GHz and 5.8dBi/5GHz are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. French:

Cet metteur radio, IC ID: 4324A-BRCM1068, a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec l'antenne intgre ou une antenne amovible PIFA avec un gain maximum de 3.9dBi/2.4GHz, 5.8dBi/5GHz. Toute autre antenne dtachable, avec un type diffrent ou ayant un gain suprieur 3.9dBi, 5.8dBi est strictement interdit pour une utilisation avec cet appareil. L'impdance d'antenne requise est de 50 ohms. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device)

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and

(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.

(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users

(i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. French:

Page 4 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11a/b/g/n/11ac WLAN + Bluetooth PCI-E Mini card, BCM94352HMB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1068; IC: 4324A-BRCM1068 Le guide dutilisation des dispositifs pour rseaux locaux doit inclure des instructions prcises sur les restrictions susmentionnes, notamment :

(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5 150-5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;

(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5 725-5 825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas.

(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Pour se conformer aux exigences de conformit 102 RSS RF exposition, pour des configurations mobiles, une distance de sparation d'au moins 20 cm doit tre maintenue entre l'antenne de cet appareil et toutes les personnes. Cet appareil ne doit pas tre co-

localiss ou fonctionnant en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou transmetteur. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 2155 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:

Page 5 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11a/b/g/n/11ac WLAN + Bluetooth PCI-E Mini card, FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1068; IC: 4324A-BRCM1068 BCM94352HMB 802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:

User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:

2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Italy:

For private use, a general authorisation is required if WAS/RLANs are used outside own premises. For public use, a general authorisation is required Page 6 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11a/b/g/n/11ac WLAN + Bluetooth PCI-E Mini card, BCM94352HMB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1068; IC: 4324A-BRCM1068 Note for system integrators:

- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.

- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:

Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Page 7 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11a/b/g/n/11ac WLAN + Bluetooth PCI-E Mini card, BCM94352HMB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1068; IC: 4324A-BRCM1068 Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.

6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide Page 8 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11a/b/g/n/11ac WLAN + Bluetooth PCI-E Mini card, BCM94352HMB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1068; IC: 4324A-BRCM1068

"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."

Translation:

"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."

8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia POSTEL, Kenya CCK, Nepal - NTA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.15-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. 11. Mexico PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide User Manual in Spanish in Mexico. The User Manual must feature the following mandatory statement:

La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia prejudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Translation:

The operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this equipment or device must not cause harmful interference and

(2) this equipment or device must accept any interference, including interference which could otherwise cause its undesired operation. 12. CB Certifications PC-OEMs must provide User Guides in the language suitable for the countries when shipping products to countries listed in the CB reports. Page 9 of 9